WO2011035124A1 - Benzodiazepinone compounds and methods of treatment using same - Google Patents

Benzodiazepinone compounds and methods of treatment using same Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2011035124A1
WO2011035124A1 PCT/US2010/049282 US2010049282W WO2011035124A1 WO 2011035124 A1 WO2011035124 A1 WO 2011035124A1 US 2010049282 W US2010049282 W US 2010049282W WO 2011035124 A1 WO2011035124 A1 WO 2011035124A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
compound
hydrogen
alkyl
benzo
methyl
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2010/049282
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Gary D. Glick
Alexander Ross Hurd
Chad Alan Van Huis
Original Assignee
The Regents Of The University Of Michigan
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by The Regents Of The University Of Michigan filed Critical The Regents Of The University Of Michigan
Priority to JP2012529929A priority Critical patent/JP2013505258A/en
Priority to EP10817891A priority patent/EP2470020A4/en
Priority to US13/395,566 priority patent/US8673897B2/en
Publication of WO2011035124A1 publication Critical patent/WO2011035124A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D403/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00
    • C07D403/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D403/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/04—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for ulcers, gastritis or reflux esophagitis, e.g. antacids, inhibitors of acid secretion, mucosal protectants
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A61P11/06—Antiasthmatics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00—Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00—Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • A61P17/06—Antipsoriatics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/04—Drugs for skeletal disorders for non-specific disorders of the connective tissue
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/08—Drugs for skeletal disorders for bone diseases, e.g. rachitism, Paget's disease
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P21/00—Drugs for disorders of the muscular or neuromuscular system
    • A61P21/04—Drugs for disorders of the muscular or neuromuscular system for myasthenia gravis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P29/00—Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/04—Antibacterial agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/02—Immunomodulators
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/02—Immunomodulators
    • A61P37/06—Immunosuppressants, e.g. drugs for graft rejection
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/08—Antiallergic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P7/00—Drugs for disorders of the blood or the extracellular fluid
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P7/00—Drugs for disorders of the blood or the extracellular fluid
    • A61P7/02—Antithrombotic agents; Anticoagulants; Platelet aggregation inhibitors
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D243/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing seven-membered rings having two nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D243/06—Heterocyclic compounds containing seven-membered rings having two nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms having the nitrogen atoms in positions 1 and 4
    • C07D243/10—Heterocyclic compounds containing seven-membered rings having two nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms having the nitrogen atoms in positions 1 and 4 condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems
    • C07D243/14—1,4-Benzodiazepines; Hydrogenated 1,4-benzodiazepines
    • C07D243/16—1,4-Benzodiazepines; Hydrogenated 1,4-benzodiazepines substituted in position 5 by aryl radicals
    • C07D243/18—1,4-Benzodiazepines; Hydrogenated 1,4-benzodiazepines substituted in position 5 by aryl radicals substituted in position 2 by nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur atoms
    • C07D243/24—Oxygen atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D243/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing seven-membered rings having two nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D243/06—Heterocyclic compounds containing seven-membered rings having two nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms having the nitrogen atoms in positions 1 and 4
    • C07D243/10—Heterocyclic compounds containing seven-membered rings having two nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms having the nitrogen atoms in positions 1 and 4 condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems
    • C07D243/14—1,4-Benzodiazepines; Hydrogenated 1,4-benzodiazepines
    • C07D243/16—1,4-Benzodiazepines; Hydrogenated 1,4-benzodiazepines substituted in position 5 by aryl radicals
    • C07D243/18—1,4-Benzodiazepines; Hydrogenated 1,4-benzodiazepines substituted in position 5 by aryl radicals substituted in position 2 by nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur atoms
    • C07D243/24—Oxygen atoms
    • C07D243/26—Preparation from compounds already containing the benzodiazepine skeleton

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to inhibitors of FiF 0 -ATPases (e.g., mitochondrial FiFo-ATPases), and their therapeutic use.
  • FiF 0 -ATPases e.g., mitochondrial FiFo-ATPases
  • the present invention relates to 1 ,4- benzodiazepinone compounds that inhibit FiFo-ATPase, and methods of using 1 ,4- benzodiazepinone compounds as therapeutic agents to treat a number of medical conditions.
  • Multicellular organisms exert precise control over cell number. A balance between cell proliferation and cell death achieves this homeostasis. Cell death occurs in nearly every type of vertebrate cell via necrosis or through a suicidal form of cell death, known as apoptosis. Apoptosis is triggered by a variety of extracellular and intracellular signals that engage a common, genetically programmed death mechanism.
  • Multicellular organisms use apoptosis to instruct damaged or unnecessary cells to destroy themselves for the good of the organism. Control of the apoptotic process therefore is very important to normal development, for example, fetal development of fingers and toes requires the controlled removal, by apoptosis, of excess interconnecting tissues, as does the formation of neural synapses within the brain. Similarly, controlled apoptosis is responsible for the sloughing off of the inner lining of the uterus (the endometrium) at the start of
  • apoptosis plays an important role in tissue sculpting and normal cellular maintenance, it is also a component of the primary defense against cells and invaders (e.g., viruses) which threaten the well being of the organism.
  • Multicellular organisms also use apoptosis to instruct cells with damaged nucleic acids (e.g., DNA) to destroy themselves prior to becoming cancerous.
  • Some cancer-causing viruses overcome this safeguard by reprogramming infected (transformed) cells to abort the normal apoptotic process.
  • HPVs human papilloma viruses
  • E6 protein which inactivates the p53 apoptosis promoter.
  • Epstein-Barr virus the causative agent of mononucleosis and Burkitt's lymphoma, reprograms infected cells to produce proteins that prevent normal apoptotic removal of the aberrant cells thus allowing the cancerous cells to proliferate and to spread throughout the organism.
  • HIV human immunodeficiency virus
  • Some cancers that arise by non-viral means have also developed mechanisms to escape destruction by apoptosis.
  • Melanoma cells for instance, avoid apoptosis by inhibiting the expression of the gene encoding Apaf-1.
  • Other cancer cells especially lung and colon cancer cells, secrete high levels of soluble decoy molecules that inhibit the initiation of CTL mediated clearance of aberrant cells.
  • Faulty regulation of the apoptotic machinery has also been implicated in various degenerative conditions and vascular diseases.
  • It is apparent that controlled regulation of the apoptotic process and its cellular machinery is vital to the survival of multicellular organisms. Typically, the biochemical changes that occur in a cell instructed to undergo apoptosis occur in an orderly procession.
  • cytotoxic agents have widespread utility in both human and animal health and represent the first line of treatment for nearly all forms of cancer and hyperproliferative immune disorders like lupus erythematosus and rheumatoid arthritis.
  • cytotoxic agents in clinical use exert their effect by damaging DNA (e.g., cis- diaminodichloroplatanim(II) cross-links DNA, whereas bleomycin induces strand cleavage).
  • DNA e.g., cis- diaminodichloroplatanim(II) cross-links DNA
  • bleomycin induces strand cleavage.
  • the result of this nuclear damage if recognized by cellular factors like the p53 system, is to initiate an apoptotic cascade leading to the death of the damaged cell.
  • cytotoxic chemotherapeutic agents have serious drawbacks. For example, many known cytotoxic agents show little discrimination between healthy and diseased cells. This lack of specificity often results in severe side effects that can limit efficacy and/or result in early mortality. Moreover, prolonged administration of many existing cytotoxic agents results in the expression of resistance genes (e.g. , bcl-2 family or multi-drug resistance (MDR) proteins) that render further dosing either less effective or useless. Some cytotoxic agents induce mutations in p53 and related proteins. Based on these considerations, ideal cytotoxic drugs should only kill diseased cells and not be susceptible to chemo-resistance.
  • resistance genes e.g. , bcl-2 family or multi-drug resistance (MDR) proteins
  • One strategy to selectively kill diseased cells or block their growth is to develop drugs that selectively recognize molecules expressed in diseased cells.
  • effective cytotoxic chemotherapeutic agents would recognize disease indicative molecules and induce (either directly or indirectly) the death of the diseased cell.
  • markers on some types of cancer cells have been identified and targeted with therapeutic antibodies and small molecules, unique traits for diagnostic and therapeutic exploitation are not known for most cancers.
  • the present invention provides inhibitors of FiF 0 -ATPases (e.g., mitochondrial FiF 0 - ATPases), and methods for treating various conditions using such inhibitors.
  • FiF 0 -ATPases e.g., mitochondrial FiF 0 - ATPases
  • the invention provides a family of compounds represented by Formula I:
  • the invention provides a family of compounds represented by Formula II:
  • the invention provides a family of compounds represented by Formula III:
  • compositions comprising a compound described herein and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the invention provides a method of treating a patient suffering from a medical condition, comprising administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of one or more benzodiazepinone compounds described herein.
  • a large number of diseases can be treated using the benzodiazepinone compounds described herein.
  • the compounds described herein may be used to treat diseases characterized by dysregulation of necrosis and/or apoptosis processes in a cell or tissue, diseases characterized by aberrant cell growth and/or hyperproliferation, etc.
  • the compounds described herein may be used to treat, for example, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, graft- versus-host disease, Crohn's disease, inflammatory bowel disease, multiple sclerosis, psoriasis, systemic lupus
  • erythematosus Celiac Sprue, idiopathic thrombocytopenic thrombotic purpura, myasthenia gravis, Sjogren's syndrome, scleroderma, ulcerative colitis, asthma, cardiovascular disease, myeloma, lymphoma, cancer, and bacterial infection.
  • compositions of the present invention are used to treat immune/chronic inflammatory conditions ⁇ e.g., psoriasis, autoimmune disorders, organ- transplant rejection, epidermal hyperplasia, Crohn's disease, inflammatory bowel disease, and multiple sclerosis).
  • the compositions of the present invention are used in conjunction with stenosis therapy to treat compromised ⁇ e.g., occluded) vessels.
  • the composition comprising a benzodiazepinone compound is administered under conditions (e.g., timing, dose, co-administration with other agent, mode of
  • the subject is also administered Bz-423 or a related compound (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Nos. 7,144,880 and 7,125,866, U.S. Patent
  • the invention provides a method of treating a disorder selected from the group consisting of rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, graft-versus-host disease, Crohn's disease, inflammatory bowel disease, multiple sclerosis, systemic lupus erythematosus, Celiac Sprue, idiopathic thrombocytopenic thrombotic purpura, myasthenia gravis, Sjogren's syndrome, scleroderma, ulcerative colitis, asthma, epidermal hyperplasia, cardiovascular disease, myeloma, lymphoma, cancer, and bacterial infection, comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound described herein, e.g., as Formula I, II, or III as described herein, to a patient in need thereof to ameliorate a symptom of the disorder.
  • a disorder selected from the group consisting of rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, graft-versus-host disease
  • the compound is embraced by Formula I described above.
  • the compound is one of the compounds listed in Tables 1-4.
  • the disorder is Crohn's disease, inflammatory bowel disease, multiple sclerosis, graft-versus-host disease, systemic lupus erythematosus, rheumatoid arthritis, or psoriasis.
  • the disorder is rheumatoid arthritis, graft-versus-host disease, or inflammatory bowel disease.
  • the disorder is myeloma, lymphoma, cardiovascular disease, or cancer.
  • the disorder is a bacterial infection.
  • the patient is a human.
  • the invention provides a method of inhibiting an FiFo-ATPase, for example, a mitochondrial FiFo-ATPase.
  • the method comprises exposing the FiFo-ATPase to a compound of described herein, e.g., a Formula of I, II, or III as described herein, to inhibit said FiFo-ATPase.
  • chemical moiety refers to any chemical compound containing at least one carbon atom.
  • chemical moieties include, but are not limited to, aromatic chemical moieties, chemical moieties comprising sulfur, chemical moieties comprising nitrogen, oxygen, hydrophilic chemical moieties, and hydrophobic chemical moieties.
  • alkyl is art-recognized and refers to saturated aliphatic groups, including straight-chain alkyl groups, branched-chain alkyl groups, cycloalkyl (alicyclic) groups, alkyl substituted cycloalkyl groups, and cycloalkyl substituted alkyl groups.
  • a straight chain or branched chain alkyl has about 30 or fewer carbon atoms in its backbone (e.g., C1-C30 for straight chain, C3-C30 for branched chain), and alternatively, about 20 or fewer.
  • cycloalkyls have from about 3 to about 10 carbon atoms in their ring structure, and alternatively about 5, 6 or 7 carbons in the ring structure.
  • Exemplary alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, 2 -methyl- 1 -propyl, 2-methyl-2-propyl, 2- methyl-1 -butyl, 3 -methyl- 1 -butyl, 2-methyl-3 -butyl, 2,2-dimethyl-l -propyl, 2-methyl-l-pentyl, 3-methyl-l-pentyl, 4-methyl-l -pentyl, 2-methyl-2-pentyl, 3-methyl-2-pentyl, 4-methyl-2- pentyl, 2,2-dimethyl-l -butyl, 3,3-dimethyl-l-butyl, 2-ethyl-l -butyl, butyl, isobutyl, t-butyl, pentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, etc.
  • alkylene is art-recognized and refers to a straight or branched, saturated aliphatic, divalent radical having the number of carbon atoms indicated (e.g., (Ci_6)alkylene includes methylene (-CH 2 -), ethylene (-CH 2 CH 2 -), trimethylene (-CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 -), and the like.)
  • haloalkyl is art-recognized and refers to an alkyl group that is substituted with at least one halogen.
  • haloalkyl refers to an alkyl group that is substituted with at least one halogen.
  • hydroxyalkyl refers to an alkyl group that is substituted with an -OH group.
  • alkoxy is art-recognized and refers to an alkyl group attached to an oxygen atom (-O-alkyl).
  • exemplary alkoxy groups include, but are not limited to methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, etc.
  • aralkyl refers to an alkyl group substituted with an aryl group.
  • heteroarylkyl refers to an alkyl group substituted with a heteroaryl group.
  • alkenyl and alkynyl are art-recognized and refer to unsaturated aliphatic groups analogous in length and possible substitution to the alkyls described above, but that contain at least one double or triple bond respectively.
  • aryl is art-recognized and refers to a carbocyclic aromatic group.
  • aryl groups include phenyl, naphthyl, anthracenyl, and the like.
  • the aromatic ring may be substituted at one or more ring positions with, for example, halogen, azide, alkyl, aralkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxyl, alkoxyl, amino, nitro, sulfhydryl, imino, amido, carboxylic acid, -C(0)alkyl, -C0 2 alkyl, carbonyl, carboxyl, alkylthio, sulfonyl, sulfonamido, sulfonamide, ketone, aldehyde, ester, heterocyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl moieties, -CF 3 , -CN, or the like.
  • aryl also includes polycyclic ring systems having two or more carbocyclic rings in which two or more carbons are common to two adjoining rings (the rings are "fused rings") wherein at least one of the rings is aromatic, e.g., the other cyclic rings may be cycloalkyls, cycloalkenyls, cycloalkynyls, and/or aryls. In certain embodiments, the aromatic ring is not substituted, i.e., an unsubstituted aryl.
  • haloaryl refers to an aryl group that is substituted with at least one halogen.
  • heteroaryl is art-recognized and refers to aromatic groups that include at least one ring heteroatom. In certain instances, a heteroaryl group contains 1, 2, 3, or 4 ring heteroatoms. Representative examples of heteroaryl groups include pyrrolyl, furanyl, thiophenyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, triazolyl, pyrazolyl, pyridinyl, pyrazinyl, pyridazinyl and pyrimidinyl, and the like.
  • the heteroaryl ring may be substituted at one or more ring positions with, for example, halogen, azide, alkyl, aralkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxyl, alkoxyl, amino, nitro, sulfhydryl, imino, amido, carboxylic acid, - C(0)alkyl, -C0 2 alkyl, carbonyl, carboxyl, alkylthio, sulfonyl, sulfonamido, sulfonamide, ketone, aldehyde, ester, heterocyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl moieties, -CF 3 , -CN, or the like.
  • heteroaryl also includes polycyclic ring systems having two or more rings in which two or more carbons are common to two adjoining rings (the rings are "fused rings") wherein at least one of the rings is heteroaromatic, e.g., the other cyclic rings may be cycloalkyls, cycloalkenyls, cycloalkynyls, and/or aryls.
  • the heteroaromatic ring is not substituted, i.e., an unsubstituted heteroaryl.
  • haloheteroaryl refers to an heteroaryl group that is substituted with at least one halogen.
  • ortho, meta and para are art-recognized and refer to 1 ,2-, 1 ,3- and 1 ,4- disubstituted benzenes, respectively.
  • the names 1 ,2-dimethylbenzene and ortho- dimethylbenzene are synonymous.
  • substituted aryl refers to an aromatic ring or fused aromatic ring system consisting of at least one aromatic ring, and where at least one of the hydrogen atoms on a ring carbon has been replaced by, for example, a halogen, an amino, a hydroxy, a nitro, a thio, a ketone, an aldehyde, an ester, an amide, a lower aliphatic, a substituted lower aliphatic, or a ring (aryl, substituted aryl, cycloaliphatic, or substituted cycloaliphatic). Examples of such include, but are not limited to, hydroxyphenyl and the like.
  • cycloaliphatic refers to an aliphatic structure containing a fused ring system. Examples of such include, but are not limited to, decalin and the like.
  • substituted cycloaliphatic refers to a cycloaliphatic structure where at least one of the aliphatic hydrogen atoms has been replaced by a halogen, a nitro, a thio, an amino, a hydroxy, a ketone, an aldehyde, an ester, an amide, a lower aliphatic, a substituted lower aliphatic, or a ring (aryl, substituted aryl, cycloaliphatic, or substituted cycloaliphatic). Examples of such include, but are not limited to, 1-chlorodecalyl, bicyclo- heptanes, octanes, and nonanes (e.g., nonrbornyl) and the like.
  • heterocyclic represents, for example, an aromatic or nonaromatic ring containing one or more heteroatoms.
  • the heteroatoms can be the same or different from each other.
  • examples of heteratoms include, but are not limited to nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur.
  • Aromatic and nonaromatic heterocyclic rings are well-known in the art. Some nonlimiting examples of aromatic heterocyclic rings include pyridine, pyrimidine, indole, purine, quinoline and isoquinoline.
  • Nonlimiting examples of nonaromatic heterocyclic compounds include piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, pyrrolidine and pyrazolidine.
  • oxygen containing heterocyclic rings include, but not limited to furan, oxirane, 2H-pyran, 4H-pyran, 2H-chromene, and benzofuran.
  • sulfur-containing heterocyclic rings include, but not limited to furan, oxirane, 2H-pyran, 4H-pyran, 2H-chromene, and benzofuran.
  • heterocyclic rings include, but are not limited to, thiophene, benzothiophene, and parathiazine.
  • nitrogen containing rings include, but not limited to, pyrrole, pyrrolidine, pyrazole, pyrazolidine, imidazole, imidazoline, imidazolidine, pyridine, piperidine, pyrazine, piperazine, pyrimidine, indole, purine, benzimidazole, quinoline, isoquinoline, triazole, and triazine.
  • heterocyclic rings containing two different heteroatoms include, but are not limited to, phenothiazine, morpholine, parathiazine, oxazine, oxazole, thiazine, and thiazole.
  • the heterocyclic ring is optionally further substituted at one or more ring positions with, for example, halogen, azide, alkyl, aralkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxyl, alkoxyl, amino, nitro, sulfhydryl, imino, amido, carboxylic acid, -C(0)alkyl, -C0 2 alkyl, carbonyl, carboxyl, alkylthio, sulfonyl, sulfonamido, sulfonamide, ketone, aldehyde, ester, heterocyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl moieties, -CF 3 , -CN, or the like.
  • derivatives of a compound refers to a chemically modified compound wherein the chemical modification takes place either at a functional group of the compound (e.g., aromatic ring) or on the benzodiazepine backbone.
  • derivatives include, but are not limited to, esters of alcohol-containing compounds, esters of carboxy-containing compounds, amides of amine-containing compounds, amides of carboxy-containing
  • IC 50 is art-recognized and refers to the concentration of a compound that is required for 50% inhibition of its target.
  • EC50 is art-recognized and refers to the concentration of a compound at which 50% of its maximal effect is observed.
  • subject and patient refer to organisms to be treated by the methods of the present invention. Such organisms preferably include, but are not limited to, mammals (e.g., murines, simians, equines, bovines, porcines, canines, felines, and the like), and most preferably includes humans.
  • the terms “subject” and “patient” generally refer to an individual who will receive or who has received treatment (e.g., administration of a compound of the present invention and optionally one or more other agents) for a condition characterized by the dysregulation of apoptotic processes.
  • the "target cells" of the compositions and methods of the present invention include, refer to, but are not limited to, lymphoid cells or cancer cells.
  • Lymphoid cells include B cells, T cells, and granulocytes.
  • Granulocyctes include eosinophils and macrophages.
  • target cells are continuously cultured cells or uncultered cells obtained from patient biopsies.
  • the target cells exhibit pathological growth or proliferation.
  • pathologically proliferating or growing cells refers to a localized population of proliferating cells in an animal that is not governed by the usual limitations of normal growth.
  • un-activated target cell refers to a cell that is either in the G 0 phase or one to which a stimulus has not been applied.
  • the term "activated target lymphoid cell” refers to a lymphoid cell that has been primed with an appropriate stimulus to cause a signal transduction cascade, or alternatively, a lymphoid cell that is not in G 0 phase.
  • Activated lymphoid cells may proliferate, undergo activation induced cell death, or produce one or more cytotoxins, cytokines, or other related membrane-associated proteins characteristic of the cell type (e.g., CD8 + or CD4 ). They are also capable of recognizing and binding any target cell that displays a particular antigen on its surface, and subsequently releasing its effector molecules.
  • activated cancer cell refers to a cancer cell that has been primed with an appropriate stimulus to cause signal transduction.
  • An activated cancer cell may or may not be in the Go phase.
  • An activating agent is a stimulus that upon interaction with a target cell results in a signal transduction cascade.
  • activating stimuli include, but are not limited to, small molecules, radiant energy, and molecules that bind to cell activation cell surface receptors.
  • Responses induced by activation stimuli can be characterized by changes in, among others, intracellular Ca 2+ , superoxide, or hydroxyl radical levels; the activity of enzymes like kinases or phosphatases; or the energy state of the cell.
  • activating agents also include transforming oncogenes.
  • the term "effective amount” refers to the amount of a compound (e.g., a compound of the present invention) sufficient to effect beneficial or desired results.
  • An effective amount can be administered in one or more administrations, applications or dosages and is not intended to be limited to a particular formulation or administration route.
  • the term “dysregulation of the process of cell death” refers to any aberration in the ability (e.g., predisposition) of a cell to undergo cell death via either necrosis or apoptosis.
  • Dysregulation of cell death is associated with or induced by a variety of conditions, including for example, immune disorders (e.g., systemic lupus erythematosus, autoimmune disorders, rheumatoid arthritis, graft-versus-host disease, myasthenia gravis, Sjogren's syndrome, etc.), chronic inflammatory conditions (e.g., psoriasis, asthma and Crohn's disease), hyperprohferative disorders (e.g., tumors, B cell lymphomas, T cell lymphomas, etc.), viral infections (e.g., herpes, papilloma, HIV), and other conditions such as osteoarthritis and atherosclerosis.
  • immune disorders e.g., systemic lupus erythematosus, autoimmune disorders, rheumatoid arthritis, graft-versus-host disease, myasthenia gravis, Sjogren's syndrome, etc.
  • chronic inflammatory conditions e.g.,
  • the dysregulation when the dysregulation is induced by or associated with a viral infection, the viral infection may or may not be detectable at the time dysregulation occurs or is observed. That is, viral-induced dysregulation can occur even after the disappearance of symptoms of viral infection.
  • a "hyperproliferative disorder,” as used herein refers to any condition in which a localized population of proliferating cells in an animal is not governed by the usual limitations of normal growth.
  • hyperproliferative disorders include tumors, neoplasms, lymphomas and the like.
  • a neoplasm is said to be benign if it does not undergo invasion or metastasis and malignant if it does either of these.
  • a metastatic cell or tissue means that the cell can invade and destroy neighboring body structures.
  • Hyperplasia is a form of cell proliferation involving an increase in cell number in a tissue or organ, without significant alteration in structure or function.
  • Metaplasia is a form of controlled cell growth in which one type of fully differentiated cell substitutes for another type of differentiated cell. Metaplasia can occur in epithelial or connective tissue cells. A typical metaplasia involves a somewhat disorderly metaplastic epithelium.
  • immune disorder refers to any condition in which an organism produces antibodies or immune cells which recognize the organism's own molecules, cells or tissues.
  • Non-limiting examples of immune disorders include autoimmune disorders, immune hemolytic anemia, immune hepatitis, Berger's disease or IgA nephropathy, Celiac Sprue, chronic fatigue syndrome, Crohn's disease, dermatomyositis, fibromyalgia, graft versus host disease, Grave's disease, Hashimoto's thyroiditis, idiopathic thrombocytopenia purpura, lichen planus, multiple sclerosis, myasthenia gravis, psoriasis, rheumatic fever, rheumatic arthritis, scleroderma, Sjorgren syndrome, systemic lupus erythematosus, type 1 diabetes, ulcerative colitis, vitiligo, tuberculosis, and the like.
  • chronic inflammatory condition refers to a condition wherein the organism's immune cells are activated. Such a condition is characterized by a persistent inflammatory response with pathologic sequelae. This state is characterized by infiltration of mononuclear cells, proliferation of fibroblasts and small blood vessels, increased connective tissue, and tissue destruction.
  • chronic inflammatory diseases include, but are not limited to, Crohn's disease, psoriasis, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, inflammatory bowel disease, multiple sclerosis, and asthma. Immune diseases such as rheumatoid arthritis and systemic lupus erythematosus can also result in a chronic inflammatory diseases.
  • co-administration refers to the administration of at least two agent(s) (e.g., a compound of the present invention) or therapies to a subject. In some embodiments, the co-administration of two or more agents/therapies is concurrent. In other embodiments, a first agent/therapy is administered prior to a second agent/therapy.
  • a first agent/therapy is administered prior to a second agent/therapy.
  • the appropriate dosage for co-administration can be readily determined by one skilled in the art. In some embodiments, when agents/therapies are co- administered, the respective agents/therapies are administered at lower dosages than
  • co-administration is especially desirable in embodiments where the co-administration of the agents/therapies lowers the requisite dosage of a known potentially harmful (e.g., toxic) agent(s).
  • a known potentially harmful agent(s) e.g., toxic
  • composition refers to the combination of an active agent with a carrier, inert or active, making the composition especially suitable for diagnostic or therapeutic use in vivo or ex vivo.
  • the term "pharmaceutically acceptable carrier” refers to any of the standard pharmaceutical carriers, such as a phosphate buffered saline solution, water, emulsions (e.g., such as an oil/water or water/oil emulsions), and various types of wetting agents.
  • the compositions also can include stabilizers and preservatives.
  • stabilizers and adjuvants See e.g., Martin, Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 15th Ed., Mack Publ. Co., Easton, PA [1975]).
  • salts of the compounds of the present invention may be derived from inorganic or organic acids and bases.
  • acids include, but are not limited to, hydrochloric, hydrobromic, sulfuric, nitric, perchloric, fumaric, maleic, phosphoric, glycolic, lactic, salicylic, succinic, toluene-p-sulfonic, tartaric, acetic, citric, methanesulfonic, ethanesulfonic, formic, benzoic, malonic, naphthalene- 2-sulfonic, benzenesulfonic acid, and the like.
  • Other acids such as oxalic, while not in themselves pharmaceutically acceptable, may be employed in the preparation of salts useful as intermediates in obtaining the compounds of the invention and their pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts.
  • bases include, but are not limited to, alkali metals (e.g., sodium) hydroxides, alkaline earth metals (e.g., magnesium), hydroxides, ammonia, and compounds of formula NW 4 + , wherein W is Ci_ 4 alkyl, and the like.
  • salts include, but are not limited to: acetate, adipate, alginate, aspartate, benzoate, benzenesulfonate, bisulfate, butyrate, citrate, camphorate, camphorsulfonate, cyclopentanepropionate, digluconate, dodecylsulfate, ethanesulfonate, fumarate,
  • salts include anions of the compounds of the present invention compounded with a suitable cation such as Na + , NH 4 + , and NW 4 + (wherein W is a Ci_ 4 alkyl group), and the like.
  • salts of the compounds of the present invention are provided.
  • salts of acids and bases that are non-pharmaceutically acceptable may also find use, for example, in the preparation or purification of a pharmaceutically acceptable compound.
  • sample as used herein is used in its broadest sense.
  • a sample suspected of indicating a condition characterized by the dysregulation of apoptotic function may comprise a cell, tissue, or fluids, chromosomes isolated from a cell (e.g., a spread of metaphase chromosomes), genomic DNA (in solution or bound to a solid support such as for Southern blot analysis), RNA (in solution or bound to a solid support such as for Northern blot analysis), cDNA (in solution or bound to a solid support) and the like.
  • a sample suspected of containing a protein may comprise a cell, a portion of a tissue, an extract containing one or more proteins and the like.
  • the terms “purified” or “to purify” refer to the removal of undesired components from a sample.
  • the term “substantially purified” refers to molecules that are at least 60% free, preferably 75% free, and most preferably 90%, or more, free from other components with which they usually associated.
  • the terms "specific binding” or “specifically binding” when used in reference to the interaction of an antibody and a protein or peptide means that the interaction is dependent upon the presence of a particular structure (i.e., the antigenic determinant or epitope) on the protein; in other words the antibody is recognizing and binding to a specific protein structure rather than to proteins in general. For example, if an antibody is specific for epitope "A,” the presence of a protein containing epitope A (or free, unlabelled A) in a reaction containing labeled "A" and the antibody will reduce the amount of labeled A bound to the antibody.
  • non-specific binding and “background binding” when used in reference to the interaction of an antibody and a protein or peptide refer to an interaction that is not dependent on the presence of a particular structure (i.e., the antibody is binding to proteins in general rather that a particular structure such as an epitope).
  • the term “modulate” refers to the activity of a compound (e.g., a compound of the present invention) to affect (e.g. , to promote or retard) an aspect of cellular function, including, but not limited to, cell growth, proliferation, apoptosis, and the like.
  • the term "competes for binding” is used in reference to a first molecule (e.g. , a first compound of the present invention) with an activity that binds to the same target (e.g., the oligomycin sensitivity conferring protein in mitochondrial ATP synthase) as does a second molecule (e.g., a second compound of the present invention or other molecule that binds to the oligomycin sensitivity conferring protein in mitochondrial ATP synthase, etc.).
  • the efficiency e.g., kinetics or thermodynamics
  • the first molecule may be the same as, or greater than, or less than, the efficiency of the target binding to the second molecule.
  • the equilibrium binding constant (K Q ) for binding to the substrate may be different for the two molecules.
  • test compound refers to any chemical entity, pharmaceutical, drug, and the like, that can be used to treat or prevent a disease, illness, sickness, or disorder of bodily function, or otherwise alter the physiological or cellular status of a sample (e.g., the level of dysregulation of apoptosis in a cell or tissue).
  • Test compounds comprise both known and potential therapeutic compounds.
  • a test compound can be determined to be therapeutic by using the screening methods of the present invention.
  • a "known therapeutic compound” refers to a therapeutic compound that has been shown (e.g., through animal trials or prior experience with administration to humans) to be effective in such treatment or prevention.
  • test compounds are agents that modulate apoptosis in cells.
  • compositions specifying a percentage are by weight unless otherwise specified.
  • variable is not accompanied by a definition, then the previous definition of the variable controls.
  • Generic chemical structures are intended to encompass all stereoisomeric forms (e.g., racemic mixtures, enantiomers, diastereomers, etc.) unless indicated otherwise. From the description herein, it will be apparent to the skilled artisan that many specific examples are represented by the generic chemical formulae, definitions for variables associated with the generic chemical formulae, and, in certain embodiments, methods of using such compounds to treat various medicinal disorders.
  • X 1 is CI and X 2 is H in Formula I.
  • X 1 is F and X 2 is halogen in Formula I.
  • a wide variety of such combinations arising from selecting a particular group at each substituent position are possible and all such combinations are within the scope of this invention.
  • a compound of Formula I is used in a method of treating rheumatoid arthritis.
  • a compound of Formula I is used in a method of treating graft- versus-host disease.
  • the present invention relates to inhibitors of FiFo-ATPases (e.g., mitochondrial FiF 0 -ATPases) and their therapeutic use.
  • FiFo-ATPases e.g., mitochondrial FiF 0 -ATPases
  • the present invention provides benzodiazepinone compounds useful as FiF 0 -ATPase inhibitors, and methods of using such compounds as therapeutic agents to treat a number of different conditions.
  • compositions and methods of the present invention are described in more detail in the following sections: I. Modulators of FiFo-ATPase Activity; II. 1 ,4- Benzodiazepinone Compounds; III. Therapeutic Applications of 1 ,4-Benzodiazepinone Compounds; and IV. Pharmaceutical Compositions, Formulations, and Exemplary Administration Routes and Dosing Considerations.
  • the present invention regulates FiF 0 -ATPase activity (e.g., mitochondrial FiFo-ATPase activity) through the exposure of cells to compounds of the present invention.
  • the compounds inhibit ATP synthesis and ATP hydrolysis.
  • the effect of the compounds can be measured by detecting any number of cellular changes.
  • mitochondrial FiFo-ATPase activity and/or cell death may be assayed as described herein and in the art.
  • cell lines are maintained under appropriate cell culturing conditions ⁇ e.g. , gas (C0 2 ), temperature and media) for an appropriate period of time to attain exponential proliferation without density dependent constraints.
  • Cell number and or viability are measured using standard techniques, such as trypan blue exclusion/hemo-cytometry, or a MTT dye conversion assay.
  • the cell may be analyzed for the expression of genes or gene products associated with aberrations in apoptosis or necrosis.
  • exposing the compounds of the present invention to a cell induces apoptosis.
  • the present invention induces apoptosis or arrest of cell proliferation through interacting with the mitochondrial FiFo-ATPase.
  • the compounds of the present invention inhibit mitochondrial FiFo-ATPase activity through binding the OSCP. In some embodiments, the compounds of the present invention bind the junction between the OSCP and the Fi subunit of the mitochondrial FIFQ- ATPase. In some embodiments, the compounds of the present invention bind the Fi subunit. In certain embodiments, screening assays of the present invention permit detection of binding partners of the OSCP, F l s or OSCP/ Fi junction.
  • exposing a compound described herein to a cell induces apoptosis.
  • the compound causes an initial increase in cellular ROS levels (e.g., 0 2 ⁇ ).
  • exposure of the compound to a cell causes an increase in cellular 0 2 " levels.
  • the increase in cellular 0 2 " levels resulting from the compound is detectable with a redox-sensitive agent that reacts specifically with 0 2 ⁇ (e.g., dihydroethidium (DHE)).
  • DHE dihydroethidium
  • increased cellular 0 2 ⁇ levels resulting from compounds described herein diminish after a period of time (e.g., 10 minutes). In other embodiments, increased cellular 0 2 ⁇ levels resulting from the compounds diminish after a period of time and increase again at a later time (e.g., 10 hours). In further embodiments, increased cellular 0 2 ⁇ levels resulting from the compounds diminish at 1 hour and increase again after 4 hours. In some embodiments, an early increase in cellular 0 2 ⁇ levels, followed by a diminishing in cellular 0 2 ⁇ levels, followed by another increase in cellular 0 2 ⁇ levels resulting from the compounds is due to different cellular processes (e.g., bimodal cellular mechanisms).
  • a compound described herein causes a collapse of a cell's mitochondrial transmembrane potential ( ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ).
  • a collapse of a cell's mitochondrial ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ resulting from the compound is detectable with a mitochondria-selective potentiometric probe (e.g., 3,3 '-Dihexyloxacarbocyanine iodide, DiOC 6 ).
  • a collapse of a cell's mitochondrial ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ resulting from the compound occurs after an initial increase in cellular 0 2 ⁇ levels.
  • the present invention enables caspase activation.
  • a compound described herein causes the release of cytochrome c from mitochondria.
  • the compound alters cystolic cytochrome c levels.
  • altered cystolic cytochrome c levels resulting from compound are detectable by immunoblotting cytosolic fractions.
  • diminished cystolic cytochrome c levels resulting from the compound are detectable after a period of time (e.g., 10 hours). In further preferred embodiments, diminished cystolic cytochrome c levels resulting from the compound are detectable after 5 hours.
  • the present invention causes the opening of the mitochondrial permeability transition pore.
  • the cellular release of cytochrome c resulting from a compound described herein is consistent with a collapse of mitochondrial ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ .
  • the compound causes an increase in cellular 0 2 ⁇ levels after a mitochondrial ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ collapse and a release of cytochrome c.
  • a rise in cellular 0 2 ⁇ levels is caused by a mitochondrial A x V m collapse and release of cytochrome c resulting from the compound.
  • the present invention causes cellular caspase activation.
  • caspase activation resulting from a compound described herein is measurable with a pan-caspase sensitive fluorescent substrate (e.g., FAM-VAD-fmk).
  • caspase activation resulting from the compound tracks with a collapse of mitochondrial ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ .
  • the compound causes an appearance of
  • hypodiploid DNA an appearance of hypodiploid DNA resulting from the compound is slightly delayed with respect to caspase activation.
  • the molecular target for the present invention is found within mitochondria.
  • the molecular target of the present invention involves the mitochondrial ATPase.
  • the primary sources of cellular ROS include redox enzymes and the mitochondrial respiratory chain (hereinafter MRC).
  • cytochrome c oxidase (complex IV of the MRC) inhibitors e.g., NaN 3
  • the ubiquinol- cytochrome c reductase component of MRC complex III inhibitors preclude a present invention dependent increase in ROS levels.
  • an increase in cellular ROS levels result from the binding of the compounds of the present invention to a target within mitochondria.
  • the compounds of the present invention oxidize 2',7'-dichlorodihydrofluorescin (hereinafter DCF) diacetate to DCF.
  • DCF is a redox-active species capable of detecting ROS.
  • the rate of DCF production resulting from the present invention increases after a lag period.
  • Antimycin A generates 0 2 ⁇ by inhibiting ubiquinol-cytochrome c reductase.
  • the present invention provides compounds that increase cellular ROS and this ROS is believed to arise from ubiquinol-cytochrome c.
  • the present invention increases cellular ROS production under aerobic conditions supporting state 3 respiration.
  • the compounds of the present invention do not directly target the MPT pore.
  • the compounds of the present invention do not generate substantial ROS in the subcellular S15 fraction (e.g., cytosol; microsomes).
  • the compounds of the present invention do not stimulate ROS if mitochondria are in state 4 respiration.
  • MRC complexes I - III are the primary sources of ROS within mitochondria.
  • the primary source of an increase in cellular ROS levels resulting from the compounds of the present invention emanates from these complexes as a result of inhibiting the FiFo-ATPase.
  • the present invention inhibits ATPase activity of bovine sub-mitochondrial particles (hereinafter SMPs).
  • SMPs bovine sub-mitochondrial particles
  • the compounds of the present invention bind to the OSCP component of the FiFo-ATPase.
  • Oligomycin is a macrolide natural product that binds to the FiF 0 - ATPase, induces a state 3 to 4 transition, and as a result, generates ROS (e.g., 0 2 ⁇ ).
  • the compounds of the present invention bind the OSCP component of the FiFo-ATPase.
  • the compounds of the present invention bind the junction between the OSCP and the Fi subunit of the FiF 0 -ATPase.
  • the compounds of the present invention bind the Fi subunit.
  • screening assays of the present invention permit detection of binding partners of the OSCP, F l s or OSCP/ Fi junction.
  • OSCP is an intrinsically fluorescent protein.
  • titrating a solution of test compounds of the present invention into an E. Coli sample overexpressing OSCP and/or an OSCP analog attached with a fluorescent label results in quenching of the intrinsic OSCP fluorescence.
  • fluorescent or radioactive test compounds can be used in direct binding assays.
  • competition binding experiments can be conducted. In this type of assay, test compounds are assessed for their ability to compete with a known binding compound for binding to, for example, the OSCP.
  • the compounds of the present invention cause an increase in cellular ROS levels and apoptosis in cells through regulation of the OSCP gene ⁇ e.g., altering expression of the OSCP gene).
  • the present invention functions by altering the molecular motions of the ATPase motor.
  • the invention provides a family of compounds represented by Formula I:
  • X 1 is CI or F
  • X 2 is hydrogen, halogen, hydroxyl, methoxy, ethoxy, methyl, or R 1 is hydrogen, C 1 -C 3 alkyl, hydroxyethyl, or hydroxypropyl;
  • R 3 and R 4 are independently hydrogen, C 1 -C 5 alkyl, or Z; provided that both R 3 and R 4 are not hydrogen, and provided that both R 3 and R 4 are not Z;
  • R 5 represents independently for each occurrence halogen, trifluoromethyl, or C 1 -C 5 alkyl
  • R 6 represents independently for each occurrence hydrogen or C 1 -C 5 alkyl
  • Z is Ci-C 4 alkylene-C0 2 R 6 , Ci-C 4 alkylene-C(0)N(R 6 ) 2 , or C C 4 alkyl substituted with
  • n 1 or 2; and the stereochemical configuration at a stereocenter in a compound represented by Formula I is R, S, or a mixture thereof.
  • X 1 is CI. In certain other embodiments, X 1 is F. In certain embodiments, X 2 is hydrogen or halogen. In certain other embodiments, X 2 is hydrogen. In certain embodiments, R 1 is other embodiments, R 1 is C 1 -C 3 alkyl. In
  • R is ertain other embodiments, R is
  • R 3 and R 4 are independently hydrogen or C 1 -C5 alkyl; provided that both R 3 and R 4 are not hydrogen.
  • R 3 is hydrogen; and R 4 is Ci- C 5 alkyl or Z.
  • R 3 is C 1 -C 5 alkyl or Z; and R 4 is hydrogen.
  • R 3 is hydrogen; and R 4 is methyl, ethyl or propyl.
  • R 3 is methyl, ethyl or propyl; and R 4 is hydrogen.
  • R 5 is halogen.
  • R 5 is chloro.
  • R 5 is chloro or fluoro.
  • n is 1. In certain embodiments, n is 2. [00092]
  • the com ound is represented by Formula IA:
  • R 1 is hydrogen, methyl, or ethyl
  • R 3 and R 4 are independently hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, or Z; provided that both R 3 and R 4 are not hydrogen, and provided that both R 3 and R 4 are not Z;
  • R 5 represents independently for each occurrence CI or F
  • Z is hydroxyethyl, hydroxylpropyl, or hydroxybutyl
  • n 1 or 2;
  • the stereochemical configuration at a stereocenter in a compound represented by Formula IA is R, S, or a mixture thereof.
  • R 3 and R 4 are independently hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, or propyl; provided that both R 3 and R 4 are not hydrogen.
  • R 3 is hydrogen; and R 4 is methyl, ethyl or propyl.
  • R 3 is methyl, ethyl or propyl; and R 4 is hydrogen.
  • R 5 is CI, and n is 1.
  • R 2 is [00094]
  • the compound is represented by Formula IB:
  • R 1 is hydrogen or methyl
  • R 2 is R 4 is methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl,
  • R 5 represents independently for each occurrence CI or F; n is 1 or 2; and the stereochemical configuration at a stereocenter in a compound represented by Formula IB is R, S, or a mixture thereof.
  • R 1 is hydrogen and n is 1.
  • R 1 is hydrogen, n is 1, and R 4 is methyl, ethyl,
  • R 2 is s and R 4 is methyl, ethyl, or propyl.
  • the com ound is represented by Formula IC:
  • R 1 is hydrogen and n is 1.
  • R 1 is hydrogen, n is 1 , and R 3 is methyl, ethyl,
  • R J is methyl, ethyl, or propyl.
  • the invention provides a family of compounds represented by Formula II:
  • X is hydrogen, halogen, hydroxyl, methoxy, ethoxy, methyl, or
  • R 1 is hydrogen, C 1 -C3 alkyl, hydroxyethyl, or hydroxypropyl
  • R 3 represents independently for each occurrence halogen, trifluoromethyl, or C 1 -C5 alkyl; n is 1 or 2; and the stereochemical configuration at a stereocenter in a compound represented by Formula II is R, S, or a mixture thereof.
  • X is hydrogen.
  • R 1 is hydrogen 2 -C3 alkyl.
  • R 3 is halogen.
  • R 3 is CI.
  • R 3 is trifluoromethyl.
  • n is 1.
  • R 3 represents independently for each occurrence CI or F, and n is 2.
  • X 1 is CI, F, or -CF 3 ;
  • X 2 is hydrogen, halogen, hydroxyl, methoxy, ethoxy, methyl, or ethyl;
  • R 1 is hydrogen, C 1 -C3 alkyl, hydroxyethyl, or hydroxypropyl
  • R 2 represents independently for each occurrence halogen, trifluoromethyl, or Ci-C 3 alkyl
  • R 3 represents independently for each occurrence Ci-C 3 alkyl, Ci-C 4 alkylene-C0 2 R 5 , or Ci-C 4 alkylene-C(0)N(R 5 ) 2 ;
  • R 4 is hydrogen or halogen
  • R 5 represents independently for each occurrence hydrogen or C 1 -C5 alkyl
  • n and n are independently 1 or 2;
  • the stereochemical configuration at a stereocenter in a compound represented by Formula III is R, S, or a mixture thereof.
  • X 1 is CI. In certain other embodiments, X 1 is F. In certain other embodiments, X 1 is -CF 3 . In certain embodiments, X 2 is hydrogen. In certain other embodiments, X 2 is halogen. In certain embodiments, R 1 is hydrogen. In certain other embodiments, R 1 is Ci-C 3 alkyl. In certain embodiments, R 2 is trifluoromethyl. In certain embodiments, R 2 is halogen. In certain other embodiments, R 2 is CI or F. In certain embodiments, R 3 is Ci-C 3 alkyl. In certain other embodiments, R 3 is methyl. In certain embodiments, R 4 is hydrogen. In certain other embodiments, R 4 is halogen.
  • R 4 is fluoro or chloro.
  • n is 1. In certain other embodiments, n is 2. In certain embodiments, m is 1. [000100] In certain embodiments, the invention provides a family of compounds represented by Formula IIIA:
  • X 1 is CI, F, or CF 3 ;
  • R 1 is hydrogen, C 1 -C3 alkyl, hydroxy ethyl, or hydroxypropyl;
  • R 2 represents independently for each occurrence halogen or trifluoromethyl;
  • R 3 is Ci-C 3 alkyl;
  • n is 1 or 2; and the stereochemical configuration at a stereocenter in a compound represented by Formula IIIA is R, S, or a mixture thereof.
  • X 1 is CI.
  • R 1 is hydrogen or Ci-C 3 alkyl.
  • R 2 is chloro or fiuoro.
  • R 3 is methyl.
  • the compound is one of the compounds listed in Tables 1-4 herein below, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of said compounds. It is understood that the foregoing compounds can be combined with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier to produce a pharmaceutical composition.
  • the invention provides enantiomerically pure compounds.
  • exemplary enantiomerically pure compounds are provided in Table 4 below. TABLE 4
  • the synthetic route illustrated in Scheme 1 involves combining isatoic anhydride A and an amino acid, such as glycine, in an organic solvent such as acetic acid and applying heat to facilitate the formation of benzodiazepine C.
  • Functional groups can be added to the Nl- position of benzodiazepine C using standard alkylation chemistry described in the art.
  • amide protection of benzodiazepine C can be performed bv reactine the compound with a base, such as potassium tert-butoxide, followed by a benzyl bromide, such as p-methoxy benzylbromide.
  • Introduction of other alkyl groups at the Nl -position can be performed at this stage.
  • a protected hydroxyethyl group can be installed at the Nl -position by reacting benzodiazepine C with 2-bromoethyl acetate in the presence of a base. Saponification of the acetate ester provides a hydroxyethyl group at the Nl -position.
  • Alkylation of A to provide intermediate B may be carried out by treating A with an inorganic base, such as sodium carbonate or sodium hydride, and an alkyl or benzyl halide.
  • an inorganic base such as sodium carbonate or sodium hydride
  • an alkyl or benzyl halide such as sodium carbonate or sodium hydride
  • alkyl or benzyl halide such as sodium carbonate or sodium hydride
  • the second step illustrated in Scheme 2 involves combining isatoic anhydride B and an an amino acid, such as glycine in an organic solvent such as acetic acid or N,N- dimethylformamide, and heating the mixture to a temperature in the range of about 60-130 °C for about 12-36 hours.
  • the condensation reaction may be performed in two steps.
  • the first step involves combining an amino acid and isatoic anhydride B in a solvent such as pyridine or acetonitrile, with or without water, containing triethylamine at a temperature in the range of about 20-100 °C for approximately 12-18 hours followed by removing the solvents in vacuo.
  • the second step involves addition of an organic solvent, such as acetic acid or N,N- dimethylformamide, and heating the mixture to a temperature in the range of about 80-130 °C for about 12-24 hours.
  • the synthetic route in Scheme 3 illustrates a one-step process for constructing the benzodiazepine core and installing C3-functionality.
  • the reaction involves combining an amino acid and an isatoic anhydride, such as A, in an organic solvent such as acetic acid or N,N-dimethylformamide, and heating the mixture to a temperature in the range of about 60-130 °C for about 12-36 hours.
  • the condensation reaction may be performed in two steps.
  • the first step involves combining an amino acid, such as a phenylalanine derivative, and an isatoic anhydride, in a solvent such as pyridine or acetonitrile, with or without water, containing triethylamine at a temperature in the range of about 20-100 °C for approximately 12-18 hours followed by removing the solvents in vacuo.
  • the second step involves adding an organic solvent, such as acetic acid or N,N-dimethylformamide, and heating the mixture to a temperature in the range of about 80-130 °C for about 12-24 hours to provide intermediate H.
  • a protecting group can be installed at the Nl -position by reacting intermediate H with a mild base and /?-methoxybenzyl (PMB) chloride.
  • R" mono- or di-halogen, alkyl, etc.
  • the next phase of the synthesis involves installing the C3 and/or C5 functional groups, as illustrated in Scheme 4.
  • a chlorinating agent such as phosphoryl chloride in toluene buffered with N,N-dimethylaniline
  • imidoyl chloride D is generally performed at elevated temperature (e.g. 90 °C) for several hours (e.g., 4-18 hours).
  • elevated temperature e.g. 90 °C
  • Other chlorinating agents are known in the art and are contemplated to be amenable to the synthetic route.
  • Compound G can be prepared from compound D using either of the two synthetic strategies shown in Scheme 4.
  • compound D is treated with a strong base, e.g., potassium tert-butoxide, and then a benzyl halide, to provide intermediate F.
  • Imidoyl chloride F may be converted to compound G using Suzuki cross-coupling conditions employing a boronic acid or boronate ester coupling partner in the presence of an appropriate palladium catalyst.
  • Suzuki cross-coupling procedures are described by Nadin and co-workers. See Nadin et al. in J. Org. Chem. 2003, 68, 2844-2852.
  • boron-containing reagents for use in Suzuki cross-coupling are known in the art and contemplated to be amenable to the synthetic route.
  • boron-containing reagents that are not commercially available may be prepared from the requisite aryl halide (e.g., iodide or bromide) under standard conditions, e.g., by treatment with bis(pinacolato)diboron in hot 1,4-dioxane containing a catalytic amount of a palladium catalyst.
  • intermediate E is alkylated at the C3 -position to introduce a C3-aralkyl group.
  • the alkylation step is carried out by treating intermediate E with a base, e.g., potassium tert-butoxide, at reduced temperature, e.g., -78 °C to -20 °C, followed by addition of a benzyl halide.
  • a base e.g., potassium tert-butoxide
  • benzyl halides that are not commercially available may be prepared by one of several routes that will be familiar to one skilled in the art of organic synthesis: for example, reduction of a commercially available carboxylic acid (e.g., reduction using lithium aluminum hydride), formylation of an appropriate aromatic compound followed by reduction and conversion of the resulting alcohol to a halide in one step or two steps, such as via a sulfonate ester.
  • Scheme 4 for example, reduction of a commercially available carboxylic acid (e.g., reduction using lithium aluminum hydride), formylation of an appropriate aromatic compound followed by reduction and conversion of the resulting alcohol to a halide in one step or two steps, such as via a sulfonate ester.
  • the Ari group installed at the C5-position during palladium-catalyzed cross coupling may be the substituent which appears in the final product, or it may be a precursor to the substituent at the C5-position in the final product.
  • Scheme 5 illustrates preparation of an aryl boronic acid for use in a palladium-catalyzed cross coupling reaction to install the Ari group, where the installed Ari group serves as a precursor to the C5 -substituent in the final product.
  • the required Suzuki coupling partner (boronate or boronic acid) can be prepared from readily available aryl bromides, such as 4-bromo-2-fluoro-l -nitrobenzene and 4-bromo-l-fluoro-2- nitrobenzene.
  • Displacement of the fluorine atom with an alkyl amine occurs under SNAr conditions according to procedures described in the literature, and borylation at the bromine position can be performed using bis(pinacolato)diboron and a palladium catalyst according to standard conditions.
  • Scheme 6 illustrates installation of an Ari group at the C5-position and conversion of the Ari group to the C5-substituent that appears in the final product.
  • a palladium-catalyzed cross-coupling reaction e.g., Suzuki Reaction
  • a final deprotection step can be used to remove the para-methoxybenzyl (PMB) group at Nl and the tert-butyldimethylsilyl (TBDMS) group protecting the hydroxy 1 group.
  • PMB para-methoxybenzyl
  • TDMS tert-butyldimethylsilyl
  • R alkyl or PMB
  • X is Br or I
  • the protecting groups can be removed using standard deprotection procedures known in the art. See, for example, Greene, T.W.; Wuts, P.G.M. Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 2 nd ed.; Wiley: New York, 1991. For instance, removal of a nitrogen protecting group such as a p- methoxybenzyl (PMB) group at the -position may be performed using A1C1 3 or cerium ammonium nitrate (CAN). Similarly, demethylation or debenzylation of a phenolic ether in the Ari -group may be performed using BBr 3 , EtSH or A1C1 3 to provide phenols. Representative deprotection procedures are illustrated in Scheme 8.
  • PMB p- methoxybenzyl
  • CAN cerium ammonium nitrate
  • demethylation or debenzylation of a phenolic ether in the Ari -group may be performed using BBr 3 , EtSH or A1C1 3 to provide phenols
  • the 1 ,4-benzodiazepinone compounds of Formulae I, II, and III and related 1 ,4-benzodiazepinone compounds provide therapeutic benefits to patients suffering from any one or more of a number of conditions, e.g., diseases characterized by dysregulation of FiF 0 -ATPase activity, diseases characterized by dysregulation of necrosis and/or apoptosis processes in a cell or tissue, disease characterized by aberrant cell growth and/or hyperproliferation.
  • the compounds described herein can also be used to treat a variety of dysregulatory disorders related to cellular death as described elsewhere herein. Additionally, the compounds described herein can be used to inhibit both ATP synthesis and hydrolysis.
  • a large number of diseases can be treated using the 1 ,4-benzodiazepinone compounds described herein.
  • the compounds described herein can be used to treat diseases characterized by dysregulation of necrosis and/or apoptosis processes in a cell or tissue, diseases characterized by aberrant cell growth and/or hyperproliferation, etc., or lupus, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, graft-versus-host disease, Crohn's disease, inflammatory bowel disease, multiple sclerosis, epidermal hyperplasia, cardiovascular disease, myeloma, lymphoma, cancer, and bacterial infection.
  • the compounds impart therapeutic benefit by modulating (e.g., inhibiting or promoting) the activity of the FiF 0 -ATPase complexes (e.g., mitochondrial FiF 0 - ATPase complexes) in affected cells or tissues.
  • the compositions of the present invention are used to treat immune/chronic inflammatory conditions (e.g., psoriasis, autoimmune disorders, organ-transplant rejection, and epidermal hyperplasia).
  • the compositions of the present invention are used in conjunction with stenosis therapy to treat compromised (e.g., occluded) vessels.
  • composition comprising a 1 ,4-benzodiazepinone compound is administered under conditions (e.g., timing, dose, co-administration with other agent, mode of administration, selection of subject, use of targeting agents, etc.) that maximize desired effects directed at the FiF 0 - ATPase.
  • conditions e.g., timing, dose, co-administration with other agent, mode of administration, selection of subject, use of targeting agents, etc.
  • the invention provides a method of treating a disorder selected from the group consisting of rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, graft-versus-host disease, Crohn's disease, inflammatory bowel disease, multiple sclerosis, psoriasis, systemic lupus erythematosus, Celiac Sprue, idiopathic thrombocytopenic thrombotic purpura, myasthenia gravis, Sjogren's syndrome, scleroderma, ulcerative colitis, asthma, epidermal hyperplasia, cardiovascular disease, myeloma, lymphoma, cancer, and bacterial infection, comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula I, II, or III to a patient in need thereof to ameliorate a symptom of the disorder, wherein the definition of Formula I, II, and III are as provided above.
  • said compound is one of the compounds listed in Tables 1- 4. In certain embodiments, said compound is one of the compounds listed in Table 1.
  • the disorder is Crohn's disease, inflammatory bowel disease, multiple sclerosis, graft-versus-host disease, lupus, rheumatoid arthritis, or psoriasis.
  • the disorder is rheumatoid arthritis, graft-versus-host disease, or inflammatory bowel disease.
  • the disorder is Crohn's disease, inflammatory bowel disease, multiple sclerosis, graft-versus-host disease, systemic lupus erythematosus, rheumatoid arthritis, or psoriasis.
  • the disorder is cardiovascular disease, myeloma, lymphoma, or cancer.
  • the disorder is systemic lupus erythematosus, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, graft-versus-host disease, myeloma, or lymphoma.
  • the disorder is cardiovascular disease or cancer.
  • the disorder is Crohn's disease, inflammatory bowel disease, or multiple sclerosis.
  • the disorder is graft-versus- host disease.
  • the disorder is a bacterial infection.
  • the patient is a human.
  • the 1 ,4-benzodiazepinone compounds described herein can be used in combination with at least one other therapeutic agent, such as Bz-423 (a benzodiazepine compound as described in U.S. Patent Nos. 7,144,880 and 7,125,866, U.S. Patent Application Serial Nos. 12/044,589, 11/586,097, 11/585,492, 11/445,010, 11/324,419, 11/176,719,
  • Bz-423 a benzodiazepine compound as described in U.S. Patent Nos. 7,144,880 and 7,125,866, U.S. Patent Application Serial Nos. 12/044,589, 11/586,097, 11/585,492, 11/445,010, 11/324,419, 11/176,719,
  • any one or more of these compounds can be used to treat a FiF 0 -ATP hydrolase associated disorder (e.g., myocardial infarction, ventricular hypertrophy, coronary artery disease, non-Q wave MI, congestive heart failure, cardiac arrhythmias, unstable angina, chronic stable angina, Prinzmetal's angina, high blood pressure, intermittent claudication, peripheral occlusive arterial disease, thrombotic or thromboembolic symptoms of a FiF 0 -ATP hydrolase associated disorder (e.g., myocardial infarction, ventricular hypertrophy, coronary artery disease, non-Q wave MI, congestive heart failure, cardiac arrhythmias, unstable angina, chronic stable angina, Prinzmetal's angina, high blood pressure, intermittent claudication, peripheral occlusive arterial disease, thrombotic or thromboembolic symptoms of a FiF 0 -ATP hydrolase associated disorder (e.g., myocardial infarction,
  • thromboembolic stroke venous thrombosis, arterial thrombosis, cerebral thrombosis, pulmonary embolism, cerebral embolism, thrombophilia, disseminated intravascular coagulation, restenosis, atrial fibrillation, ventricular enlargement, atherosclerotic vascular disease, atherosclerotic plaque rupture, atherosclerotic plaque formation, transplant
  • Atherosclerosis vascular remodeling atherosclerosis, cancer, surgery, inflammation, systematic infection, artificial surfaces, interventional cardiology, immobility, medication, pregnancy and fetal loss, and diabetic complications comprising retinopathy, nephropathy and neuropathy) in a patient.
  • the 1 ,4-benzodiazepinone compounds described herein can be used in the treatment of a bacterial infection.
  • a variety of bacteria are contemplated to be susceptible to the benzodiazepinone compounds.
  • Representative bacteria include
  • Staphylococci species e.g., S. aureus
  • Enterococci species e.g., E.faecalis and E.faecium
  • Staphylococci species e.g., S. aureus
  • Enterococci species e.g., E.faecalis and E.faecium
  • Streptococci species e.g., S. pyogenes and S. pneumoniae
  • Escherichia species e.g., E. coli, including enterotoxigenic, enteropathogenic, enteroinvasive, enterohemorrhagic and enteroaggregative E. coli strains
  • Haemophilus species e.g., H. influenza
  • Moraxella species e.g., M. catarrhalis.
  • Other examples include Mycobacteria species, e.g., M.
  • tuberculosis M. avian-intracellular e, M. kansasii, M. bovis, M. africanum, M. genavense, M. leprae, M. xenopi, M. simiae, M. scrofulaceum, M. malmoense, M. celatum, M. abscessus, M. chelonae, M. szulgai, M. gordonae, M. haemophilum, M.fortuni and M. marinum;
  • Corynebacteria species e.g., C. diphtheriae
  • Vibrio species e.g., V. cholerae
  • Campylobacter species e.g., C. jejuni
  • Helicobacter species e.g., H. pylori
  • Pseudomonas species e.g., P. aeruginosa
  • Legionella species e.g., L. pneumophila
  • Treponema species e.g., T. pallidum
  • Borrelia species e.g., B. burgdorferi
  • Listeria species e.g., L monocytogenes
  • Bacillus species e.g., B.
  • Neisseria species e.g., N. meningitidis and N.
  • Chlamydia species e.g., C. psittaci, C. pneumoniae and C. trachomatis;
  • Rickettsia species e.g., R. rickettsii and ?. prowazekii
  • Shigella species e.g., S. sonnei
  • Rickettsia species e.g., R. rickettsii and ?. prowazekii
  • Shigella species e.g., S. sonnei
  • Salmonella species e.g., S. typhimurium
  • Yersinia species e.g., Y. enterocolitica and Y.
  • the benzodiazepinone compounds described herein are used to treat a subject suffering from a bacterial infection selected from the group consisting of S. aureus, E.faecalis, E.faecium, S. pyogenes, S.
  • the benzodiazepinone compounds described herein are used to treat a subject suffering from a Trypanosoma brucei infection.
  • the antibacterial activity of the compounds described herein may be evaluated using standard assays known in the art, such as the microbroth dilution minimum inhibition concentration (MIC) assay, as further described in National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing; Fourteenth Informational Supplement. NCCLS document Ml 00-S 14 ⁇ ISBN 1 -56238-516-X ⁇ .
  • This assay may be used to determine the minimum concentration of a compound necessary to prevent visible bacterial growth in a solution.
  • the drug to be tested is serially diluted into wells, and aliquots of liquid bacterial culture are added. This mixture is incubated under appropriate conditions, and then tested for growth of the bacteria. Compounds with low or no antibiotic activity (a high MIC) will allow growth at high concentrations of compound, while compounds with high antibiotic activity will allow bacterial growth only at lower
  • the assay uses stock bacterial culture conditions appropriate for the chosen strain of bacteria.
  • Stock cultures from the permanent stock culture collection can be stored as frozen suspensions at -70°C. Cultures may be suspended in 10% skim milk (BD) prior to snap freezing in dry ice/ethanol and then placed in a -70°C freezer. Cultures may be maintained on Tryptic Soy Agar containing 5% Sheep Blood at room temperature (20°C), and each culture may be recovered from frozen form and transferred an additional time before MIC testing. Fresh plates are inoculated the day before testing, incubated overnight, and checked to confirm purity and identity. [000127] The identity and purity of the cultures recovered from the stock culture can be confirmed to rule out the possibility of contamination.
  • the identity of the strains may be confirmed by standard microbiological methods (See, e.g., Murray et al., Manual of Clinical Microbiology, Eighth Edition. ASM Press ⁇ ISBN 1-55581-255-4 ⁇ ). In general, cultures are streaked onto appropriate agar plates for visualization of purity, expected colony morphology, and hemolytic patterns. Gram stains can also be utilized. The identities are confirmed using a MicroScan WalkAway 40 SI Instrument (Dade Behring, West Sacramento, California). This device utilizes an automated incubator, reader, and computer to assess for identification purposes the biochemical reactions carried out by each organism. The MicroScan WalkAway can also be used to determine a preliminary MIC, which may be confirmed using the method described below.
  • Frozen stock cultures may be used as the initial source of organisms for performing microbroth dilution minimum inhibition concentration (MIC) testing. Stock cultures are passed on their standard growth medium for at least 1 growth cycle (18-24 hours) prior to their use. Most bacteria may be prepared directly from agar plates in 10 mL aliquots of the appropriate broth medium. Bacterial cultures are adjusted to the opacity of a 0.5 McFarland Standard (optical density value of 0.28-0.33 on a Perkin-Elmer Lambda EZ150 Spectrophotometer, Wellesley, Massachusetts, set at a wavelength of 600nm).
  • MIC microbroth dilution minimum inhibition concentration
  • the adjusted cultures are then diluted 400 fold (0.25 mL inoculum + 100 mL broth) in growth media to produce a starting suspension of approximately 5 x 105 colony forming units (CFU)/mL.
  • Most bacterial strains may be tested in cation adjusted Mueller Hinton Broth (CAMHB).
  • Test compounds are solubilized in a solvent suitable for the assay, such as DMSO.
  • Drug stock solutions may be prepared on the day of testing.
  • Microbroth dilution stock plates may be prepared in two dilution series, 64 to 0.06 ⁇ g drug/mL and 0.25 to 0.00025 ⁇ g drug/mL.
  • 200 of stock solution (2 mg/mL) is added to duplicate rows of a 96-well microtiter plate. This is used as the first well in the dilution series.
  • Serial two-fold decremental dilutions are made using a BioMek FX robot (Beckman Coulter Inc., Fullerton, CA) with 10 of the remaining 11 wells, each of which will contain 100 of the appropriate solvent/diluent.
  • Row 12 contains solvent/diluent only and serves as the control.
  • 200 ⁇ , of an 8 ⁇ g/mL stock are added to duplicate rows of a 96-well plate.
  • Serial two-fold dilutions are made as described above.
  • Daughter 96-well plates may be spotted (3.2 ⁇ ) from the stock plates listed above using the BioMek FX robot and used immediately or frozen at -70°C until use. Aerobic organisms are inoculated (100 ⁇ ⁇ volumes) into the thawed plates using the BioMek FX robot. The inoculated plates are be placed in stacks and covered with an empty plate. These plates are then incubated for 16 to 24 hours in ambient atmosphere according to CLSI guidelines
  • the degree of bacterial growth can be estimated visually with the aid of a Test Reading Mirror (Dynex Technologies 220 16) in a darkened room with a single light shining directly through the top of the microbroth tray.
  • the MIC is the lowest concentration of drug that prevents macroscopically visible growth under the conditions of the test.
  • medicaments to treat or study a variety of conditions associated with dysregulation of cell death, aberrant cell growth and hyperproliferation are associated with dysregulation of cell death, aberrant cell growth and hyperproliferation.
  • the compounds are also useful for preparing medicaments for treating or studying other disorders wherein the effectiveness of the compounds are known or predicted.
  • disorders include, but are not limited to, neurological (e.g., epilepsy) or neuromuscular disorders.
  • the methods and techniques for preparing medicaments of a compound of the present invention are well-known in the art. Exemplary pharmaceutical formulations and routes of delivery are described below. [000135]
  • One of skill in the art will appreciate that any one or more of the compounds described herein, including the many specific embodiments, are prepared by applying standard pharmaceutical manufacturing procedures. Such medicaments can be delivered to the subject by using delivery methods that are well-known in the pharmaceutical arts.
  • compositions are administered alone, while in some other embodiments, the compositions are preferably present in a pharmaceutical formulation comprising at least one active ingredient/agent, as discussed above, together with a solid support or alternatively, together with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers and optionally other therapeutic agents (e.g., those described in section III hereinabove).
  • a pharmaceutical formulation comprising at least one active ingredient/agent, as discussed above, together with a solid support or alternatively, together with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers and optionally other therapeutic agents (e.g., those described in section III hereinabove).
  • Each carrier should be "acceptable” in the sense that it is compatible with the other ingredients of the formulation and not injurious to the subject.
  • Contemplated formulations include those suitable for oral, rectal, nasal, topical (including transdermal, buccal and sublingual), vaginal, parenteral (including subcutaneous, intramuscular, intravenous and intradermal) and pulmonary administration.
  • formulations are conveniently presented in unit dosage form and are prepared by any method known in the art of pharmacy. Such methods include the step of bringing into association the active ingredient with the carrier which constitutes one or more accessory ingredients.
  • the formulations are prepared by uniformly and intimately bringing into association (e.g. , mixing) the active ingredient with liquid carriers or finely divided solid carriers or both, and then if necessary shaping the product.
  • Formulations of the present invention suitable for oral administration may be presented as discrete units such as capsules, cachets or tablets, wherein each preferably contains a predetermined amount of the active ingredient; as a powder or granules; as a solution or suspension in an aqueous or non-aqueous liquid; or as an oil-in-water liquid emulsion or a water-in-oil liquid emulsion.
  • the active ingredient is presented as a bolus, electuary, or paste, etc.
  • tablets comprise at least one active ingredient and optionally one or more accessory agents/carriers are made by compressing or molding the respective agents.
  • compressed tablets are prepared by compressing in a suitable machine the active ingredient in a free-flowing form such as a powder or granules, optionally mixed with a binder (e.g., povidone, gelatin, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose), lubricant, inert diluent, preservative, disintegrant (e.g. , sodium starch glycolate, cross-linked povidone, cross- linked sodium carboxymethyl cellulose) surface-active or dispersing agent.
  • a binder e.g., povidone, gelatin, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose
  • lubricant e.g., inert diluent
  • preservative e.g. , sodium starch glycolate, cross-linked povidone, cross- linked sodium carboxymethyl cellulose
  • Molded tablets are made by molding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered compound (e.g., active ingredient) moistened with an inert liquid diluent. Tablets may optionally be coated or scored and may be formulated so as to provide slow or controlled release of the active ingredient therein using, for example, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose in varying proportions to provide the desired release profile. Tablets may optionally be provided with an enteric coating, to provide release in parts of the gut other than the stomach.
  • Formulations suitable for topical administration in the mouth include lozenges comprising the active ingredient in a flavored basis, usually sucrose and acacia or tragacanth; pastilles comprising the active ingredient in an inert basis such as gelatin and glycerin, or sucrose and acacia; and mouthwashes comprising the active ingredient in a suitable liquid carrier.
  • compositions for topical administration according to the present invention are optionally formulated as ointments, creams, suspensions, lotions, powders, solutions, pastes, gels, sprays, aerosols or oils.
  • topical is optionally formulated as ointments, creams, suspensions, lotions, powders, solutions, pastes, gels, sprays, aerosols or oils.
  • topical is optionally formulated as ointments, creams, suspensions, lotions, powders, solutions, pastes, gels, sprays, aerosols or oils.
  • formulations comprise patches or dressings such as a bandage or adhesive plasters impregnated with active ingredient(s), and optionally one or more excipients or diluents.
  • the topical formulations include a compound(s) that enhances absorption or penetration of the active agent(s) through the skin or other affected areas. Examples of such dermal penetration enhancers include dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO) and related analogues.
  • DMSO dimethylsulfoxide
  • the aqueous phase of a cream base includes, for example, at least about 30% w/w of a polyhydric alcohol, i.e., an alcohol having two or more hydroxyl groups such as propylene glycol, butane-l,3-diol, mannitol, sorbitol, glycerol and polyethylene glycol and mixtures thereof.
  • a polyhydric alcohol i.e., an alcohol having two or more hydroxyl groups such as propylene glycol, butane-l,3-diol, mannitol, sorbitol, glycerol and polyethylene glycol and mixtures thereof.
  • oily phase emulsions of this invention are constituted from known ingredients in a known manner.
  • This phase typically comprises a lone emulsifier (otherwise known as an emulgent), it is also desirable in some embodiments for this phase to further comprise a mixture of at least one emulsifier with a fat or an oil or with both a fat and an oil.
  • a hydrophilic emulsifier is included together with a lipophilic emulsifier so as to act as a stabilizer.
  • a lipophilic emulsifier so as to act as a stabilizer.
  • Emulgents and emulsion stabilizers suitable for use in the formulation of the present invention include Tween 60, Span 80, cetostearyl alcohol, myristyl alcohol, glyceryl monostearate and sodium lauryl sulfate.
  • oils or fats for the formulation is based on achieving the desired properties (e.g., cosmetic properties), since the solubility of the active compound/agent in most oils likely to be used in pharmaceutical emulsion formulations is very low.
  • creams should preferably be non-greasy, non-staining and washable products with suitable consistency to avoid leakage from tubes or other containers.
  • Straight or branched chain, mono- or dibasic alkyl esters such as di-isoadipate, isocetyl stearate, propylene glycol diester of coconut fatty acids, isopropyl myristate, decyl oleate, isopropyl palmitate, butyl stearate, 2- ethylhexyl palmitate or a blend of branched chain esters known as Crodamol CAP may be used, the last three being preferred esters. These may be used alone or in combination depending on the properties required. Alternatively, high melting point lipids such as white soft paraffin and/or liquid paraffin or other mineral oils can be used.
  • Formulations suitable for topical administration to the eye also include eye drops wherein the active ingredient is dissolved or suspended in a suitable carrier, especially an aqueous solvent for the agent.
  • Formulations for rectal administration may be presented as a suppository with suitable base comprising, for example, cocoa butter or a salicylate.
  • Formulations suitable for vaginal administration may be presented as pessaries, creams, gels, pastes, foams or spray formulations containing in addition to the agent, such carriers as are known in the art to be appropriate.
  • Formulations suitable for nasal administration include coarse powders having a particle size, for example, in the range of about 20 to about 500 microns which are administered in the manner in which snuff is taken, i.e., by rapid inhalation ⁇ e.g. , forced) through the nasal passage from a container of the powder held close up to the nose.
  • suitable formulations wherein the carrier is a liquid for administration include, but are not limited to, nasal sprays, drops, or aerosols by nebulizer, and include aqueous or oily solutions of the agents.
  • Formulations suitable for parenteral administration include aqueous and non-aqueous isotonic sterile injection solutions which may contain antioxidants, buffers, bacteriostats and solutes which render the formulation isotonic with the blood of the intended recipient; and aqueous and non-aqueous sterile suspensions which may include suspending agents and thickening agents, and liposomes or other microparticulate systems which are designed to target the compound to blood components or one or more organs.
  • the formulations are presented/formulated in unit-dose or multi-dose sealed containers, for example, ampoules and vials, and may be stored in a freeze-dried (lyophilized) condition requiring only the addition of the sterile liquid carrier, for example water for injections, immediately prior to use.
  • sterile liquid carrier for example water for injections
  • Extemporaneous injection solutions and suspensions may be prepared from sterile powders, granules and tablets of the kind previously described.
  • Preferred unit dosage formulations are those containing a daily dose or unit, daily subdose, as herein above -recited, or an appropriate fraction thereof, of an agent.
  • the formulations of this invention may include other agents conventional in the art having regard to the type of formulation in question, for example, those suitable for oral administration may include such further agents as sweeteners, thickeners and flavoring agents. It also is intended that the agents, compositions and methods of this invention be combined with other suitable compositions and therapies.
  • Still other formulations optionally include food additives (suitable sweeteners, flavorings, colorings, etc.), phytonutrients ⁇ e.g., flax seed oil), minerals ⁇ e.g., Ca, Fe, K, etc.), vitamins, and other acceptable compositions ⁇ e.g., conjugated linoelic acid), extenders, and stabilizers, etc.
  • food additives suitable sweeteners, flavorings, colorings, etc.
  • phytonutrients ⁇ e.g., flax seed oil
  • minerals e.g., Ca, Fe, K, etc.
  • vitamins and other acceptable compositions ⁇ e.g., conjugated linoelic acid
  • extenders e.g., and stabilizers, etc.
  • Various delivery systems are known and can be used to administer therapeutic agents ⁇ e.g., exemplary compounds as described above) of the present invention, e.g., encapsulation in liposomes, microparticles, microcapsules, receptor-mediated endocytosis, and the like.
  • Methods of delivery include, but are not limited to, intra-arterial, intra-muscular, intravenous, intranasal, and oral routes.
  • the agents identified can be administered to subjects or individuals susceptible to or at risk of developing pathological growth of target cells and correlated conditions.
  • the agent When the agent is administered to a subject such as a mouse, a rat or a human patient, the agent can be added to a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and systemically or topically administered to the subject.
  • a tissue sample is removed from the patient and the cells are assayed for sensitivity to the agent.
  • Therapeutic amounts are empirically determined and vary with the pathology being treated, the subject being treated and the efficacy and toxicity of the agent.
  • the method is useful to further confirm efficacy of the agent.
  • MLR/MpJ-lpr/lpr (“MLR-//?r") (available from Jackson Laboratories, Bar Harbor, Maine ). MLR-lpr mice develop systemic autoimmune disease.
  • other animal models can be developed by inducing tumor growth, for example, by subcutaneously inoculating nude mice with about 10 5 to about 10 9 hyperproliferative, cancer or target cells as defined herein. When the tumor is established, the compounds described herein are
  • tumor measurements to determine reduction of tumor size are made in two dimensions using venier calipers twice a week.
  • Other animal models may also be employed as appropriate. Such animal models for the above-described diseases and conditions are well-known in the art.
  • in vivo administration is effected in one dose, continuously or intermittently throughout the course of treatment.
  • Methods of determining the most effective means and dosage of administration are well known to those of skill in the art and vary with the composition used for therapy, the purpose of the therapy, the target cell being treated, and the subject being treated. Single or multiple administrations are carried out with the dose level and pattern being selected by the treating physician.
  • Suitable dosage formulations and methods of administering the agents are readily determined by those of skill in the art.
  • the compounds are administered at about 0.01 mg/kg to about 200 mg/kg, more preferably at about 0.1 mg/kg to about 100 mg/kg, even more preferably at about 0.5 mg/kg to about 50 mg/kg.
  • the effective amount may be less than when the agent is used alone.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions can be administered orally, intranasally, parenterally or by inhalation therapy, and may take the form of tablets, lozenges, granules, capsules, pills, ampoules, suppositories or aerosol form. They may also take the form of suspensions, solutions and emulsions of the active ingredient in aqueous or non-aqueous diluents, syrups, granulates or powders. In addition to an agent of the present invention, the pharmaceutical compositions can also contain other pharmaceutically active compounds or a plurality of compounds of the invention.
  • an agent of the present invention also referred to herein as the active ingredient, may be administered for therapy by any suitable route including, but not limited to, oral, rectal, nasal, topical (including, but not limited to, transdermal, aerosol, buccal and sublingual), vaginal, parental (including, but not limited to, subcutaneous, intramuscular, intravenous and intradermal) and pulmonary. It is also appreciated that the preferred route varies with the condition and age of the recipient, and the disease being treated.
  • the agent should be administered to achieve peak concentrations of the active compound at sites of disease. This may be achieved, for example, by the intravenous injection of the agent, optionally in saline, or by oral administration, for example, as a tablet, capsule or syrup containing the active ingredient.
  • Desirable blood levels of the agent may be maintained by a continuous infusion to provide a therapeutic amount of the active ingredient within disease tissue.
  • the use of operative combinations is contemplated to provide therapeutic combinations requiring a lower total dosage of each component antiviral agent than may be required when each individual therapeutic compound or drug is used alone, thereby reducing adverse effects.
  • the invention also includes methods involving co-administration of the compounds described herein with one or more additional active agents. Indeed, it is a further aspect of this invention to provide methods for enhancing prior art therapies and/or pharmaceutical compositions by co-administering a compound of this invention.
  • the agents may be administered concurrently or sequentially.
  • the compounds described herein are administered prior to the other active agent(s).
  • the pharmaceutical formulations and modes of administration may be any of those described above.
  • the two or more co-administered chemical agents, biological agents or radiation may each be administered using different modes or different formulations.
  • the agent or agents to be co-administered depend on the type of condition being treated.
  • the additional agent can be a chemotherapeutic agent or radiation.
  • the additional agent can be an immunosuppressant or an anti-inflammatory agent.
  • the additional agent can be an antiinflammatory agent.
  • the additional agents to be co-administered, such as anticancer, immunosuppressant, anti-inflammatory can be any of the well-known agents in the art, including, but not limited to, those that are currently in clinical use. The determination of appropriate type and dosage of radiation treatment is also within the skill in the art or can be determined with relative ease.
  • Treatment of the various conditions associated with abnormal apoptosis is generally limited by the following two major factors: (1) the development of drug resistance and (2) the toxicity of known therapeutic agents.
  • resistance to chemicals and radiation therapy has been shown to be associated with inhibition of apoptosis.
  • Some therapeutic agents have deleterious side effects, including non-specific lymphotoxicity, renal and bone marrow toxicity.
  • the methods described herein address both these problems. Drug resistance, where increasing dosages are required to achieve therapeutic benefit, is overcome by co-administering the compounds described herein with the known agent.
  • the compounds described herein sensitize target cells to known agents (and vice versa) and, accordingly, less of these agents are needed to achieve a therapeutic benefit.
  • the sensitizing function of the claimed compounds also addresses the problems associated with toxic effects of known therapeutics. In instances where the known agent is toxic, it is desirable to limit the dosages administered in all cases, and particularly in those cases where drug resistance has increased the requisite dosage. When the claimed compounds are co-administered with the known agent, they reduce the dosage required which, in turn, reduces the deleterious effects.
  • 6-Chloro-l-methyl-lH-benzo[d] [l,3]oxazine-2,4-dione 6-Chloro- lHbenzo[d][l ,3]oxazine-2,4-dione (22.88 g, 1 16 mmol) was dissolved in dimethylformamide (150 mL), and sodium carbonate (14.73 g, 139 mmol) was added. Methyl iodide (10.86 mL, 174 mmol) was then added dropwise. The reaction was stirred at room temperature overnight. Water (150 mL) was then added, and the mixture was stirred for 1 hour. The solid was collected by filtration.
  • reaction mixture was stirred for 5 min at room temperature and then 20 g (0.5 mol) of NaH was added portion- wise over 20 min (reaction temperature increased to 29 °C due to an exotherm and therefore reaction mixture was placed into water bath to keep the temperature below 30 °C). Reaction was stirred for 16 h (RT). Next day HPLC showed about 26% unreacted 5 -chloroisatoic anhydride. Additional NaH (1 g) was added and the reaction mixture was heated to 32 °C and stirred for another 5 h. NMR showed that all of the starting material had been consumed.
  • N,N-Dimethylaniline (0.36 mL, 2.9 mmol) was added followed by phosphorus oxychloride (0.20 mL, 2.1 mmol) and the mixture was heated at 90 °C for 4 hours. After cooling to ambient temperature, the mixture was diluted with 40 mL of ethyl acetate :hexanes (1 :2), washed with ice water (10 mL), ice cold 1 M hydrogen chloride (2 x 10mL),and brine, then dried with sodium sulfate, decanted and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was redissolved in a small amount of ethyl acetate, then poured onto a silica plug.
  • Benzyl halides can be prepared from the corresponding benzyl alcohol using known procedures, such as by treating a benzyl alcohol with thionyl chloride.
  • a variety of benzyl alcohols are commercially available.
  • a variety of benzyl alcohols can be prepared using the following methods: i) reduction of a commercially available carboxylic acid ⁇ e.g., reduction using lithium aluminum hydride); ii) conversion of a dibromo-benzyl alcohol to a dialkyl-benzyl alcohol using, for example, a dialkylzinc reagent in the presence of a palladium catalyst, such as PdCl 2 (dppf); iii) conversion of a dibromobenzyl acetate to a dialkyl benzyl acetate followed by hydrolysis; iv) formylation of the appropriate aromatic followed by reduction; or v) conversion of a reactive chlorobenzoate ester to the respective alkyl benzoate ester
  • Part I Representative Procedures for the Preparation of a Substituted Benzyl Alcohol from Dibromotoluene.
  • Part 5 Representative Procedure for the Synthesis of an Alkyl-Substituted Benzyl Alcohol from a Dibromobenzyl Alcohol.
  • Part 6 Representative Procedure for the Synthesis of an Alkyl-Substituted Benzyl Alcohol from an Alkyl-Substituted Benzyl Ester.
  • Part 7 Representative Procedure for the Synthesis of an Alkyl-Substituted Benzylhalide from an Alkyl-Substituted Benzyl Alcohol.
  • Step 1 Preparation of 3-((5-Bromo-2-nitrophenyl)amino)propan-l-ol.
  • 4-Bromo-2-fluoro-l -nitrobenzene (5.38 g, 24.45 mmol) was dissolved in dry DMF (50 mL) under nitrogen and treated with 3-aminopropan-l-ol (5.51 g, 73.4 mmol) at RT. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 h. TLC indicated no starting material remaining. The mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate and washed with water several times, then with brine once. It was dried (MgSC ⁇ ), then filtered and evaporated to give a yellow oil which was used without further purification.
  • Step 2 Preparation of 5-Bromo-N-(3-((tert-butyldimethylsilyl)oxy)propyl)-2-nitroaniline.
  • Step 3 Preparation of 5-Bromo- V/-(3-((tert-butyldimethylsilyl)oxy)propyl)benzene-l,2- diamine.
  • 5-Bromo-N-(3-((tert-butyldimethylsilyl)oxy)propyl)-2-nitroaniline from above was added to 2: 1 2-propanaol: water (75 mL) (precipitate formed).
  • Iron powder was added (1.147 g, 20.6 mmol) and the mixture was heated to 80 °C for 1 h. It turned black. After allowing to cool, the mixture was filtered through celite, rinsing with ethyl acetate.
  • Step 4 Preparation of 6-Bromo-l-(3-((tert-butyldimethylsilyl)oxy)propyl)-lH- benzo[d]imidazol-2(3H)-one.
  • Step 5 Preparation ofl-(3-((Tert-butyldimethylsilyl)oxy)propyl)-6-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl- l,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-lH-benzofdJimidazol-2(3H)-one.
  • Step 6 Preparation of (S)-5-(3-(3-((Tert-butyldimethylsilyl)oxy)propyl)-2-oxo-2,3-dihydro- lH-benzofdJimidazol-5-yl)-7-chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-l-(4-methoxybenzyl)-lH- benzo[e][l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one.
  • Tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (122 mg, 0.106 mmol) was added and the mixture was heated at 90 °C for 7.5 h. After cooling, the mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate and washed twice with water then once with brine then dried (MgSC ⁇ ).
  • Step 7 Preparation of (S)-7-Chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-5-(3-(3-hydroxypropyl)-2-oxo-2,3- dihydro-lH-benzofdJimidazol-5-yl)-l-(4-methoxybenzyl)-lH-benzofeJfl,4Jdiazepin-2(3H)- one.
  • Step 8 Preparation of (S)-7-Chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-5-(3-(3-hydroxypropyl)-2-oxo-2,3- dihydro-lH-benzo[d]imidazol-5-yl)-lH-benzo[e][l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one.
  • Step 1 Preparation of 2-(7-Chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-2,5-dioxo-2,3,4,5-tetrahydi benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-l-yl)ethyl acetate
  • Step 2 Preparation of l-(2-((Tert-butyldimethylsilyl)oxy)ethyl)-7-chloro-3-(2- chlorobenzyl)-3, -dihydro-lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepine-2,5-dione.
  • the product was purified by column chromatography eluting with a gradient of 0-50% ethyl acetate in hexanes to yield l-(2-((tert-butyldimethylsilyl)oxy)ethyl)-7- chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-3,4-dihydro-lH-benzo[e][l,4]diazepine-2,5-dione.
  • Step 3 Preparation of 5,7-Dichloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-l-(2-chloroethyl)-lH- benzo [e] [ 1 ,4] di
  • Step 4 Preparation of 7-Chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-l-(2-hydroxyethyl)-5-(3-methyl-2- oxo-2,3-dih dro- lH-benzo [d] imidazol-5-yl)- lH-benzo [e] [ 1 ,4] diazepin-2(3H)-one.
  • Step 1 Preparation of Palladium Coupling Compound N-Methyl-2-nitro-5-(4,4,5,5- tetramethyl-l,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)aniline.
  • the palladium coupling compound N-methyl-2-nitro-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-l,3,2- dioxaborolan-2-yl)aniline was prepared according to the following procedures.
  • Part B Preparation of N-Methyl-2-nitro-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-l,3,2- dioxaborolan-2-yl)aniline.
  • Step 2 Palladium Coupling Reaction to Provide 7-Chloro-3-(4-chlorobenzyl)-l-(4- methoxybenzyl)-5-(3-(methylamino)-4-nitrophenyl)-lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one.
  • Step 3 Reduction of Nitro-Aniline Substituted Benzodiazepine to Form Diamine Compound 5-(4-Amino-3-(methylamino)phenyl)-7-chloro-3-(4-chlorobenzyl)-l-(4- methoxybenzyl)-lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one.
  • Nitro-aniline compound 7-chloro-3-(4-chlorobenzyl)-l-(4-methoxybenzyl)-5 -(3 - (methylamino)-4-nitrophenyl)-lH-benzo[e][l ,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one was reduced using a mixture of Fe and ammonium chloride to provide the title compound having a MS (m/z) of 559.3 (M + 1) + .
  • Step 4 Reaction of Amino-aniline Substituted Benzodiazepine with Triphosgene to Form Benzimidazolone Compound 7-Chloro-3-(4-chlorobenzyl)-l-(4-methoxybenzyl)-5-(3- methyl-2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-lH-benzo[d]imidazol-5-yl)-lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-2(3H)- one.
  • Step 5 Removal of PMB Protecting Group to Provide Compound 7-Chloro-3-(4- chlorobenzyl)-5-(3-methyl-2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-lH-benzo[d]imidazol-5-yl)-lH- benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one (1-13).
  • Step 1 Preparation of 6-Fluoro-lH-benzo[d] [l,3]oxazine-2,4-dione.
  • the 6- fluoro-lH-benzo[d][l,3]oxazine-2,4-dione may be converted to a 7-fluoro-l-(4- methoxybenzyl)-3,4-dihydro-lH-benzo[e][l,4]diazepine-2,5-dione using the procedures described in Example 1.
  • Step 2 Preparation of 3-(2-Chlorobenzyl)-7-fluoro-3,4-dihydro-lH- benzo [e] [ 1 ,4] diazepine-2,5-dione.
  • Step 3 Preparation of 3-(2-Chlorobenzyl)-7-fluoro-l-(4-methoxybenzyl)-3,4-dihydro-lH- benzo[e] [l,4]diazepine-2,5-dione.
  • ara-methoxybenzylchloride (PMBCI) (1.07 mL, 7.87 mmol, 1.05 equiv) was added to a suspension of benzodiazepine-dione (2.39 g, 7.50 mmol) and potassium carbonate (1.19 g, 8.62 mmol, 1.15 equiv) in DMF (15.0 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at rt overnight. The reaction was quenched with water (100 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (2 x 50 mL). The organic extract was washed with brine (25 mL), dried (Na 2 S0 4 ), filtered and concentrated. A solid developed upon dissolution in EtOH.
  • Step 4 Preparation of Di-tert-butyl 5-(3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-7-fluoro-l-(4-methoxybenzyl)- 2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-5-yl)-2-oxo-lH-benzo[d]imidazole-l,3(2H)- dicarboxylate.
  • Step 5 Preparation of 3-(2-Chlorobenzyl)-7-fluoro-5-(2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-lH- benzo[d]imidazol-5-yl)-lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one (II-l).
  • A1C1 3 (779 mg, 5.84 mmol, 6.0 equiv) was added to a solution of PMB-protected benzodiazepine (735 mg, 0.973 mmol) in anisole (9.7 mL). The resulting orange suspension was stirred at 40 °C for 14 h. The reaction mixture was cooled to rt and poured into ice water/EtOAc and stirred vigorously for 10 min. The organic phase was separated, washed with brine, dried (Na 2 S0 4 ), filtered and concentrated. The residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (20 g Si0 2 , 0-9% MeOH/CH 2 Cl 2 ).
  • Step 1 Preparation of 8-Methox -lH-benzo[d] [l,3]oxazine-2,4-dione.
  • Step 3 Preparation of Methyl 2-amino-5-chloro-3-methoxybenzoate.
  • methyl 2-amino-3-methoxybenzoate 750 mg, 4.1 mmol
  • N,N- dimethylformamide 15 mL
  • N-chlorosuccinimide 580 mg, 4.35 mmol
  • Step 4 Preparation of 2-Amino-5-chloro-3-methox benzoic acid.
  • Methyl 2-amino-5-chloro-3-methoxybenzoate (770 mg, 3.57 mmol) was suspended in tetrahydrofuran (20 mL), 2M sodium hydroxide (5 mL) was added and the mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 20 hours. The solution was concentrated in vacuo, then partitioned between ethyl acetate and 1M hydrochloric acid. The organic layer was washed with water, then brine, dried with sodium sulfate, decanted and concentrated in vacuo to yield 2-amino-5-chloro-3-methoxybenzoic acid.
  • Step 5 Preparation of 6-Chloro-8-methox -lH-benzo d l 3 oxazine-2,4-dione.
  • Step 2 Representative Procedures for Installing a Protected Phenol at the C5-Position of a Benzodiazepine.
  • Step 3 Representative Procedures for O-Demethylation of a Protected Phenol at the C5- Position of the Benzodiazepine.
  • the substituted phenyl group was installed using Suzuki coupling, based on procedures described in, for instance, Example 7, to provide benzodiazepine E.
  • the PMB protecting group was removed by reacting benzodiazepine E with A1C1 3 , based on procedures described in, for instance, Example 8, to provide benzodiazepine F.
  • Methyl phenyl ether F was converted to phenol G using boron tribromide, based on procedures described in, for instance, Example 16.
  • the benzimidazolone substituent was installed using Suzuki coupling, based on procedures described in, for instance, Example 7, to provide benzodiazepine E. Removal of the PMB protecting group was accomplished by reacting benzodiazepine E with A1C1 3 , based on procedures described in, for instance, Example 8, to provide benzodiazepine F.

Abstract

The invention provides 1,4-benzodiazepinone compounds, pharmaceutical compositions, and methods of treating autoimmune disorders, chronic inflammatory disorders, and hyperproliferative disorders. For example, the 1,4-benzodiazepinone compounds and pharmaceutical compositions are contemplated to be useful for treating rheumatoid arthritis, graft-versus-host disease, inflammatory bowel disease, and the like.

Description

BENZODIAZEPINONE COMPOUNDS AND METHODS OF
TREATMENT USING SAME
RELATED APPLICATIONS
[0001] This application claims the benefit of and priority to United States Provisional Patent Application serial number 61/243,792, filed September 18, 2009, the contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference for all purposes.
FIELD OF THE INVENTION
[0002] The present invention relates to inhibitors of FiF0-ATPases (e.g., mitochondrial FiFo-ATPases), and their therapeutic use. In particular, the present invention relates to 1 ,4- benzodiazepinone compounds that inhibit FiFo-ATPase, and methods of using 1 ,4- benzodiazepinone compounds as therapeutic agents to treat a number of medical conditions. BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
[0003] Multicellular organisms exert precise control over cell number. A balance between cell proliferation and cell death achieves this homeostasis. Cell death occurs in nearly every type of vertebrate cell via necrosis or through a suicidal form of cell death, known as apoptosis. Apoptosis is triggered by a variety of extracellular and intracellular signals that engage a common, genetically programmed death mechanism.
[0004] Multicellular organisms use apoptosis to instruct damaged or unnecessary cells to destroy themselves for the good of the organism. Control of the apoptotic process therefore is very important to normal development, for example, fetal development of fingers and toes requires the controlled removal, by apoptosis, of excess interconnecting tissues, as does the formation of neural synapses within the brain. Similarly, controlled apoptosis is responsible for the sloughing off of the inner lining of the uterus (the endometrium) at the start of
menstruation. While apoptosis plays an important role in tissue sculpting and normal cellular maintenance, it is also a component of the primary defense against cells and invaders (e.g., viruses) which threaten the well being of the organism.
[0005] Not surprisingly many diseases are associated with dysregulation of apoptotic cell death. Experimental models have established a cause-effect relationship between aberrant apoptotic regulation and the pathagenicity of various neoplastic, autoimmune and viral diseases. For instance, in the cell-mediated immune response, effector cells (e.g., cytotoxic T lymphocytes "CTLs") destroy virus-infected cells by inducing the infected cells to undergo apoptosis. The organism subsequently relies on the apoptotic process to destroy the effector cells when they are no longer needed. Autoimmunity is normally prevented by the CTLs inducing apoptosis in each other and even in themselves. Defects in this process are associated with a variety of immune diseases such as lupus erythematosus and rheumatoid arthritis.
[0006] Multicellular organisms also use apoptosis to instruct cells with damaged nucleic acids (e.g., DNA) to destroy themselves prior to becoming cancerous. Some cancer-causing viruses overcome this safeguard by reprogramming infected (transformed) cells to abort the normal apoptotic process. For example, several human papilloma viruses (HPVs) have been implicated in causing cervical cancer by suppressing the apoptotic removal of transformed cells by producing a protein (E6) which inactivates the p53 apoptosis promoter. Similarly, the Epstein-Barr virus (EBV), the causative agent of mononucleosis and Burkitt's lymphoma, reprograms infected cells to produce proteins that prevent normal apoptotic removal of the aberrant cells thus allowing the cancerous cells to proliferate and to spread throughout the organism.
[0007] Still other viruses destructively manipulate a cell's apoptotic machinery without directly resulting in the development of a cancer. For example, the destruction of the immune system in individuals infected with the human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) is thought to progress through infected CD4+ T cells (about 1 in 100,000) instructing uninfected sister cells to undergo apoptosis.
[0008] Some cancers that arise by non-viral means have also developed mechanisms to escape destruction by apoptosis. Melanoma cells, for instance, avoid apoptosis by inhibiting the expression of the gene encoding Apaf-1. Other cancer cells, especially lung and colon cancer cells, secrete high levels of soluble decoy molecules that inhibit the initiation of CTL mediated clearance of aberrant cells. Faulty regulation of the apoptotic machinery has also been implicated in various degenerative conditions and vascular diseases. [0009] It is apparent that controlled regulation of the apoptotic process and its cellular machinery is vital to the survival of multicellular organisms. Typically, the biochemical changes that occur in a cell instructed to undergo apoptosis occur in an orderly procession. However, as shown above, flawed regulation of apoptosis can cause serious deleterious effects in the organism. [00010] There have been various attempts to control and restore regulation of the apoptotic machinery in aberrant cells (e.g., cancer cells). For example, much work has been done to develop cytotoxic agents to destroy aberrant cells before they proliferate. As such, cytotoxic agents have widespread utility in both human and animal health and represent the first line of treatment for nearly all forms of cancer and hyperproliferative immune disorders like lupus erythematosus and rheumatoid arthritis.
[00011] Many cytotoxic agents in clinical use exert their effect by damaging DNA (e.g., cis- diaminodichloroplatanim(II) cross-links DNA, whereas bleomycin induces strand cleavage). The result of this nuclear damage, if recognized by cellular factors like the p53 system, is to initiate an apoptotic cascade leading to the death of the damaged cell.
[00012] However, existing cytotoxic chemotherapeutic agents have serious drawbacks. For example, many known cytotoxic agents show little discrimination between healthy and diseased cells. This lack of specificity often results in severe side effects that can limit efficacy and/or result in early mortality. Moreover, prolonged administration of many existing cytotoxic agents results in the expression of resistance genes (e.g. , bcl-2 family or multi-drug resistance (MDR) proteins) that render further dosing either less effective or useless. Some cytotoxic agents induce mutations in p53 and related proteins. Based on these considerations, ideal cytotoxic drugs should only kill diseased cells and not be susceptible to chemo-resistance.
[00013] One strategy to selectively kill diseased cells or block their growth is to develop drugs that selectively recognize molecules expressed in diseased cells. Thus, effective cytotoxic chemotherapeutic agents, would recognize disease indicative molecules and induce (either directly or indirectly) the death of the diseased cell. Although markers on some types of cancer cells have been identified and targeted with therapeutic antibodies and small molecules, unique traits for diagnostic and therapeutic exploitation are not known for most cancers.
Moreover, for diseases like lupus, specific molecular targets for drug development have not been identified.
[00014] The need exists for improved compositions and methods for regulating the apoptotic processes in subjects afflicted with diseases and conditions characterized by faulty regulation of these processes (e.g., viral infections, hyperproliferative autoimmune disorders, chronic inflammatory conditions, and cancers). The present invention addresses this need and has other related advantages.
SUMMARY
[00015] The present invention provides inhibitors of FiF0-ATPases (e.g., mitochondrial FiF0- ATPases), and methods for treating various conditions using such inhibitors. [00016] In one aspect, the invention provides a family of compounds represented by Formula I:
Figure imgf000005_0001
I including a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein the variables are as defined in the detailed description.
[00017] In another aspect, the invention provides a family of compounds represented by Formula II:
Figure imgf000005_0002
II including a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein the variables are as defined in the detailed description.
[00018] In another aspect, the invention provides a family of compounds represented by Formula III:
Figure imgf000005_0003
III including a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein the variables are as defined in the detailed description.
[00019] The foregoing compounds can be present in pharmaceutical compositions comprising a compound described herein and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
[00020] In another aspect, the invention provides a method of treating a patient suffering from a medical condition, comprising administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of one or more benzodiazepinone compounds described herein. A large number of diseases can be treated using the benzodiazepinone compounds described herein. For example, the compounds described herein may be used to treat diseases characterized by dysregulation of necrosis and/or apoptosis processes in a cell or tissue, diseases characterized by aberrant cell growth and/or hyperproliferation, etc. In particular, the compounds described herein may be used to treat, for example, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, graft- versus-host disease, Crohn's disease, inflammatory bowel disease, multiple sclerosis, psoriasis, systemic lupus
erythematosus, Celiac Sprue, idiopathic thrombocytopenic thrombotic purpura, myasthenia gravis, Sjogren's syndrome, scleroderma, ulcerative colitis, asthma, cardiovascular disease, myeloma, lymphoma, cancer, and bacterial infection.
[00021] In certain embodiments, the compositions of the present invention are used to treat immune/chronic inflammatory conditions {e.g., psoriasis, autoimmune disorders, organ- transplant rejection, epidermal hyperplasia, Crohn's disease, inflammatory bowel disease, and multiple sclerosis). In even further embodiments, the compositions of the present invention are used in conjunction with stenosis therapy to treat compromised {e.g., occluded) vessels. In some embodiments, the composition comprising a benzodiazepinone compound is administered under conditions (e.g., timing, dose, co-administration with other agent, mode of
administration, selection of subject, use of targeting agents, etc.) that maximize desired effects directed at the FiFo-ATPase. In some embodiments, the subject is also administered Bz-423 or a related compound (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Nos. 7,144,880 and 7,125,866, U.S. Patent
Application Serial Nos. 12/044,589, 11/586,097, 11/585,492, 11/445,010, 11/324,419,
11/176,719, 11/110,228, 10/935,333, 10/886,450, 10/795,535, 10/634,114, 10/427, 211, 10/217,878, and 09/767,283, and U.S. Provisional Patent Nos. 60/878,519, 60/812,270, 60/802,394, 60/732,045, 60/730,711, 60/704,102, 60/686,348, 60/641,040, 60/607,599, and 60/565,788).
[00022] In another aspect, the invention provides a method of treating a disorder selected from the group consisting of rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, graft-versus-host disease, Crohn's disease, inflammatory bowel disease, multiple sclerosis, systemic lupus erythematosus, Celiac Sprue, idiopathic thrombocytopenic thrombotic purpura, myasthenia gravis, Sjogren's syndrome, scleroderma, ulcerative colitis, asthma, epidermal hyperplasia, cardiovascular disease, myeloma, lymphoma, cancer, and bacterial infection, comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound described herein, e.g., as Formula I, II, or III as described herein, to a patient in need thereof to ameliorate a symptom of the disorder.
[00023] In certain embodiments, the compound is embraced by Formula I described above. In certain other embodiments, the compound is one of the compounds listed in Tables 1-4. In certain embodiments, the disorder is Crohn's disease, inflammatory bowel disease, multiple sclerosis, graft-versus-host disease, systemic lupus erythematosus, rheumatoid arthritis, or psoriasis. In certain other embodiments, the disorder is rheumatoid arthritis, graft-versus-host disease, or inflammatory bowel disease. In certain other embodiments, the disorder is myeloma, lymphoma, cardiovascular disease, or cancer. In certain other embodiments, the disorder is a bacterial infection. In certain other embodiments, the patient is a human.
[00024] In another aspect, the invention provides a method of inhibiting an FiFo-ATPase, for example, a mitochondrial FiFo-ATPase. The method comprises exposing the FiFo-ATPase to a compound of described herein, e.g., a Formula of I, II, or III as described herein, to inhibit said FiFo-ATPase.
DEFINITIONS
[00025] To facilitate an understanding of the present invention, a number of terms and phrases are defined below.
[00026] The term "chemical moiety" refers to any chemical compound containing at least one carbon atom. Examples of chemical moieties include, but are not limited to, aromatic chemical moieties, chemical moieties comprising sulfur, chemical moieties comprising nitrogen, oxygen, hydrophilic chemical moieties, and hydrophobic chemical moieties. [00027] The term "alkyl" is art-recognized and refers to saturated aliphatic groups, including straight-chain alkyl groups, branched-chain alkyl groups, cycloalkyl (alicyclic) groups, alkyl substituted cycloalkyl groups, and cycloalkyl substituted alkyl groups. In certain embodiments, a straight chain or branched chain alkyl has about 30 or fewer carbon atoms in its backbone (e.g., C1-C30 for straight chain, C3-C30 for branched chain), and alternatively, about 20 or fewer. Likewise, cycloalkyls have from about 3 to about 10 carbon atoms in their ring structure, and alternatively about 5, 6 or 7 carbons in the ring structure. Exemplary alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, 2 -methyl- 1 -propyl, 2-methyl-2-propyl, 2- methyl-1 -butyl, 3 -methyl- 1 -butyl, 2-methyl-3 -butyl, 2,2-dimethyl-l -propyl, 2-methyl-l-pentyl, 3-methyl-l-pentyl, 4-methyl-l -pentyl, 2-methyl-2-pentyl, 3-methyl-2-pentyl, 4-methyl-2- pentyl, 2,2-dimethyl-l -butyl, 3,3-dimethyl-l-butyl, 2-ethyl-l -butyl, butyl, isobutyl, t-butyl, pentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, etc.
[00028] The term "alkylene" is art-recognized and refers to a straight or branched, saturated aliphatic, divalent radical having the number of carbon atoms indicated (e.g., (Ci_6)alkylene includes methylene (-CH2-), ethylene (-CH2CH2-), trimethylene (-CH2CH2CH2-), and the like.)
[00029] The term "haloalkyl" is art-recognized and refers to an alkyl group that is substituted with at least one halogen. For example, -CH2F, -CHF2, -CF3, -CH2CF3, -CF2CF3, and the like.
[00030] The term "hydroxyalkyl" refers to an alkyl group that is substituted with an -OH group. For example, -CH2OH, -CH2CH2OH, -CH2CH2OH, -CH2C(H)(OH)CH3, - CH2CH2CH2OH, and the like.
[00031] The term "alkoxy" is art-recognized and refers to an alkyl group attached to an oxygen atom (-O-alkyl). Exemplary alkoxy groups include, but are not limited to methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, etc.
[00032] The term "aralkyl" refers to an alkyl group substituted with an aryl group.
[00033] The term "heteroaralkyl" refers to an alkyl group substituted with a heteroaryl group.
[00034] The terms "alkenyl" and "alkynyl" are art-recognized and refer to unsaturated aliphatic groups analogous in length and possible substitution to the alkyls described above, but that contain at least one double or triple bond respectively.
[00035] The term "aryl" is art-recognized and refers to a carbocyclic aromatic group.
Representative aryl groups include phenyl, naphthyl, anthracenyl, and the like. The aromatic ring may be substituted at one or more ring positions with, for example, halogen, azide, alkyl, aralkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxyl, alkoxyl, amino, nitro, sulfhydryl, imino, amido, carboxylic acid, -C(0)alkyl, -C02alkyl, carbonyl, carboxyl, alkylthio, sulfonyl, sulfonamido, sulfonamide, ketone, aldehyde, ester, heterocyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl moieties, -CF3, -CN, or the like. The term "aryl" also includes polycyclic ring systems having two or more carbocyclic rings in which two or more carbons are common to two adjoining rings (the rings are "fused rings") wherein at least one of the rings is aromatic, e.g., the other cyclic rings may be cycloalkyls, cycloalkenyls, cycloalkynyls, and/or aryls. In certain embodiments, the aromatic ring is not substituted, i.e., an unsubstituted aryl. The term "haloaryl" refers to an aryl group that is substituted with at least one halogen. [00036] The "heteroaryl" is art-recognized and refers to aromatic groups that include at least one ring heteroatom. In certain instances, a heteroaryl group contains 1, 2, 3, or 4 ring heteroatoms. Representative examples of heteroaryl groups include pyrrolyl, furanyl, thiophenyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, triazolyl, pyrazolyl, pyridinyl, pyrazinyl, pyridazinyl and pyrimidinyl, and the like. The heteroaryl ring may be substituted at one or more ring positions with, for example, halogen, azide, alkyl, aralkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxyl, alkoxyl, amino, nitro, sulfhydryl, imino, amido, carboxylic acid, - C(0)alkyl, -C02alkyl, carbonyl, carboxyl, alkylthio, sulfonyl, sulfonamido, sulfonamide, ketone, aldehyde, ester, heterocyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl moieties, -CF3, -CN, or the like. The term "heteroaryl" also includes polycyclic ring systems having two or more rings in which two or more carbons are common to two adjoining rings (the rings are "fused rings") wherein at least one of the rings is heteroaromatic, e.g., the other cyclic rings may be cycloalkyls, cycloalkenyls, cycloalkynyls, and/or aryls. In certain embodiments, the heteroaromatic ring is not substituted, i.e., an unsubstituted heteroaryl. The term "haloheteroaryl" refers to an heteroaryl group that is substituted with at least one halogen.
[00037] The terms ortho, meta and para are art-recognized and refer to 1 ,2-, 1 ,3- and 1 ,4- disubstituted benzenes, respectively. For example, the names 1 ,2-dimethylbenzene and ortho- dimethylbenzene are synonymous.
[00038] As used herein, the term "substituted aryl" refers to an aromatic ring or fused aromatic ring system consisting of at least one aromatic ring, and where at least one of the hydrogen atoms on a ring carbon has been replaced by, for example, a halogen, an amino, a hydroxy, a nitro, a thio, a ketone, an aldehyde, an ester, an amide, a lower aliphatic, a substituted lower aliphatic, or a ring (aryl, substituted aryl, cycloaliphatic, or substituted cycloaliphatic). Examples of such include, but are not limited to, hydroxyphenyl and the like. [00039] As used herein, the term "cycloaliphatic" refers to an aliphatic structure containing a fused ring system. Examples of such include, but are not limited to, decalin and the like.
[00040] As used herein, the term "substituted cycloaliphatic" refers to a cycloaliphatic structure where at least one of the aliphatic hydrogen atoms has been replaced by a halogen, a nitro, a thio, an amino, a hydroxy, a ketone, an aldehyde, an ester, an amide, a lower aliphatic, a substituted lower aliphatic, or a ring (aryl, substituted aryl, cycloaliphatic, or substituted cycloaliphatic). Examples of such include, but are not limited to, 1-chlorodecalyl, bicyclo- heptanes, octanes, and nonanes (e.g., nonrbornyl) and the like.
[00041] As used herein, the term "heterocyclic" represents, for example, an aromatic or nonaromatic ring containing one or more heteroatoms. The heteroatoms can be the same or different from each other. Examples of heteratoms include, but are not limited to nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur. Aromatic and nonaromatic heterocyclic rings are well-known in the art. Some nonlimiting examples of aromatic heterocyclic rings include pyridine, pyrimidine, indole, purine, quinoline and isoquinoline. Nonlimiting examples of nonaromatic heterocyclic compounds include piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, pyrrolidine and pyrazolidine.
Examples of oxygen containing heterocyclic rings include, but not limited to furan, oxirane, 2H-pyran, 4H-pyran, 2H-chromene, and benzofuran. Examples of sulfur-containing
heterocyclic rings include, but are not limited to, thiophene, benzothiophene, and parathiazine. Examples of nitrogen containing rings include, but not limited to, pyrrole, pyrrolidine, pyrazole, pyrazolidine, imidazole, imidazoline, imidazolidine, pyridine, piperidine, pyrazine, piperazine, pyrimidine, indole, purine, benzimidazole, quinoline, isoquinoline, triazole, and triazine. Examples of heterocyclic rings containing two different heteroatoms include, but are not limited to, phenothiazine, morpholine, parathiazine, oxazine, oxazole, thiazine, and thiazole. The heterocyclic ring is optionally further substituted at one or more ring positions with, for example, halogen, azide, alkyl, aralkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxyl, alkoxyl, amino, nitro, sulfhydryl, imino, amido, carboxylic acid, -C(0)alkyl, -C02alkyl, carbonyl, carboxyl, alkylthio, sulfonyl, sulfonamido, sulfonamide, ketone, aldehyde, ester, heterocyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl moieties, -CF3, -CN, or the like.
[00042] The term "derivative" of a compound, as used herein, refers to a chemically modified compound wherein the chemical modification takes place either at a functional group of the compound (e.g., aromatic ring) or on the benzodiazepine backbone. Such derivatives include, but are not limited to, esters of alcohol-containing compounds, esters of carboxy-containing compounds, amides of amine-containing compounds, amides of carboxy-containing
compounds, imines of amino-containing compounds, acetals of aldehyde-containing
compounds, ketals of carbonyl-containing compounds, and the like.
[00043] The term "IC50" is art-recognized and refers to the concentration of a compound that is required for 50% inhibition of its target.
[00044] The term "EC50" is art-recognized and refers to the concentration of a compound at which 50% of its maximal effect is observed. [00045] As used herein, the terms "subject" and "patient" refer to organisms to be treated by the methods of the present invention. Such organisms preferably include, but are not limited to, mammals (e.g., murines, simians, equines, bovines, porcines, canines, felines, and the like), and most preferably includes humans. In the context of the invention, the terms "subject" and "patient" generally refer to an individual who will receive or who has received treatment (e.g., administration of a compound of the present invention and optionally one or more other agents) for a condition characterized by the dysregulation of apoptotic processes.
[00046] In some embodiments, the "target cells" of the compositions and methods of the present invention include, refer to, but are not limited to, lymphoid cells or cancer cells.
Lymphoid cells include B cells, T cells, and granulocytes. Granulocyctes include eosinophils and macrophages. In some embodiments, target cells are continuously cultured cells or uncultered cells obtained from patient biopsies.
[00047] In one specific embodiment, the target cells exhibit pathological growth or proliferation. As used herein, the term "pathologically proliferating or growing cells" refers to a localized population of proliferating cells in an animal that is not governed by the usual limitations of normal growth.
[00048] As used herein, the term "un-activated target cell" refers to a cell that is either in the G0 phase or one to which a stimulus has not been applied.
[00049] As used herein, the term "activated target lymphoid cell" refers to a lymphoid cell that has been primed with an appropriate stimulus to cause a signal transduction cascade, or alternatively, a lymphoid cell that is not in G0 phase. Activated lymphoid cells may proliferate, undergo activation induced cell death, or produce one or more cytotoxins, cytokines, or other related membrane-associated proteins characteristic of the cell type (e.g., CD8+ or CD4 ). They are also capable of recognizing and binding any target cell that displays a particular antigen on its surface, and subsequently releasing its effector molecules.
[00050] As used herein, the term "activated cancer cell" refers to a cancer cell that has been primed with an appropriate stimulus to cause signal transduction. An activated cancer cell may or may not be in the Go phase.
[00051] An activating agent is a stimulus that upon interaction with a target cell results in a signal transduction cascade. Examples of activating stimuli include, but are not limited to, small molecules, radiant energy, and molecules that bind to cell activation cell surface receptors. Responses induced by activation stimuli can be characterized by changes in, among others, intracellular Ca2+, superoxide, or hydroxyl radical levels; the activity of enzymes like kinases or phosphatases; or the energy state of the cell. For cancer cells, activating agents also include transforming oncogenes.
[00052] As used herein, the term "effective amount" refers to the amount of a compound (e.g., a compound of the present invention) sufficient to effect beneficial or desired results. An effective amount can be administered in one or more administrations, applications or dosages and is not intended to be limited to a particular formulation or administration route.
[00053] As used herein, the term "dysregulation of the process of cell death" refers to any aberration in the ability (e.g., predisposition) of a cell to undergo cell death via either necrosis or apoptosis. Dysregulation of cell death is associated with or induced by a variety of conditions, including for example, immune disorders (e.g., systemic lupus erythematosus, autoimmune disorders, rheumatoid arthritis, graft-versus-host disease, myasthenia gravis, Sjogren's syndrome, etc.), chronic inflammatory conditions (e.g., psoriasis, asthma and Crohn's disease), hyperprohferative disorders (e.g., tumors, B cell lymphomas, T cell lymphomas, etc.), viral infections (e.g., herpes, papilloma, HIV), and other conditions such as osteoarthritis and atherosclerosis.
[00054] It should be noted that when the dysregulation is induced by or associated with a viral infection, the viral infection may or may not be detectable at the time dysregulation occurs or is observed. That is, viral-induced dysregulation can occur even after the disappearance of symptoms of viral infection.
[00055] A "hyperproliferative disorder," as used herein refers to any condition in which a localized population of proliferating cells in an animal is not governed by the usual limitations of normal growth. Examples of hyperproliferative disorders include tumors, neoplasms, lymphomas and the like. A neoplasm is said to be benign if it does not undergo invasion or metastasis and malignant if it does either of these. A metastatic cell or tissue means that the cell can invade and destroy neighboring body structures. Hyperplasia is a form of cell proliferation involving an increase in cell number in a tissue or organ, without significant alteration in structure or function. Metaplasia is a form of controlled cell growth in which one type of fully differentiated cell substitutes for another type of differentiated cell. Metaplasia can occur in epithelial or connective tissue cells. A typical metaplasia involves a somewhat disorderly metaplastic epithelium.
[00056] The pathological growth of activated lymphoid cells often results in an immune disorder or a chronic inflammatory condition. As used herein, the term "immune disorder" refers to any condition in which an organism produces antibodies or immune cells which recognize the organism's own molecules, cells or tissues. Non-limiting examples of immune disorders include autoimmune disorders, immune hemolytic anemia, immune hepatitis, Berger's disease or IgA nephropathy, Celiac Sprue, chronic fatigue syndrome, Crohn's disease, dermatomyositis, fibromyalgia, graft versus host disease, Grave's disease, Hashimoto's thyroiditis, idiopathic thrombocytopenia purpura, lichen planus, multiple sclerosis, myasthenia gravis, psoriasis, rheumatic fever, rheumatic arthritis, scleroderma, Sjorgren syndrome, systemic lupus erythematosus, type 1 diabetes, ulcerative colitis, vitiligo, tuberculosis, and the like.
[00057] As used herein, the term "chronic inflammatory condition" refers to a condition wherein the organism's immune cells are activated. Such a condition is characterized by a persistent inflammatory response with pathologic sequelae. This state is characterized by infiltration of mononuclear cells, proliferation of fibroblasts and small blood vessels, increased connective tissue, and tissue destruction. Examples of chronic inflammatory diseases include, but are not limited to, Crohn's disease, psoriasis, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, inflammatory bowel disease, multiple sclerosis, and asthma. Immune diseases such as rheumatoid arthritis and systemic lupus erythematosus can also result in a chronic
inflammatory state.
[00058] As used herein, the term "co-administration" refers to the administration of at least two agent(s) (e.g., a compound of the present invention) or therapies to a subject. In some embodiments, the co-administration of two or more agents/therapies is concurrent. In other embodiments, a first agent/therapy is administered prior to a second agent/therapy. Those of skill in the art understand that the formulations and/or routes of administration of the various agents/therapies used may vary. The appropriate dosage for co-administration can be readily determined by one skilled in the art. In some embodiments, when agents/therapies are co- administered, the respective agents/therapies are administered at lower dosages than
appropriate for their administration alone. Thus, co-administration is especially desirable in embodiments where the co-administration of the agents/therapies lowers the requisite dosage of a known potentially harmful (e.g., toxic) agent(s).
[00059] As used herein, the term "pharmaceutical composition" refers to the combination of an active agent with a carrier, inert or active, making the composition especially suitable for diagnostic or therapeutic use in vivo or ex vivo.
[00060] As used herein, the term "pharmaceutically acceptable carrier" refers to any of the standard pharmaceutical carriers, such as a phosphate buffered saline solution, water, emulsions (e.g., such as an oil/water or water/oil emulsions), and various types of wetting agents. The compositions also can include stabilizers and preservatives. For examples of carriers, stabilizers and adjuvants. (See e.g., Martin, Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 15th Ed., Mack Publ. Co., Easton, PA [1975]).
[00061] As used herein, the term "pharmaceutically acceptable salt" refers to any
pharmaceutically acceptable salt (e.g., acid or base) of a compound of the present invention which, upon administration to a subject, is capable of providing a compound of this invention or an active metabolite or residue thereof. As is known to those of skill in the art, "salts" of the compounds of the present invention may be derived from inorganic or organic acids and bases. Examples of acids include, but are not limited to, hydrochloric, hydrobromic, sulfuric, nitric, perchloric, fumaric, maleic, phosphoric, glycolic, lactic, salicylic, succinic, toluene-p-sulfonic, tartaric, acetic, citric, methanesulfonic, ethanesulfonic, formic, benzoic, malonic, naphthalene- 2-sulfonic, benzenesulfonic acid, and the like. Other acids, such as oxalic, while not in themselves pharmaceutically acceptable, may be employed in the preparation of salts useful as intermediates in obtaining the compounds of the invention and their pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts.
[00062] Examples of bases include, but are not limited to, alkali metals (e.g., sodium) hydroxides, alkaline earth metals (e.g., magnesium), hydroxides, ammonia, and compounds of formula NW4 +, wherein W is Ci_4 alkyl, and the like.
[00063] Examples of salts include, but are not limited to: acetate, adipate, alginate, aspartate, benzoate, benzenesulfonate, bisulfate, butyrate, citrate, camphorate, camphorsulfonate, cyclopentanepropionate, digluconate, dodecylsulfate, ethanesulfonate, fumarate,
flucoheptanoate, glycerophosphate, hemisulfate, heptanoate, hexanoate, hydrochloride, hydrobromide, hydroiodide, 2-hydroxyethanesulfonate, lactate, maleate, methanesulfonate, 2- naphthalenesulfonate, nicotinate, oxalate, palmoate, pectinate, persulfate, phenylpropionate, picrate, pivalate, propionate, succinate, tartrate, thiocyanate, tosylate, undecanoate, and the like. Other examples of salts include anions of the compounds of the present invention compounded with a suitable cation such as Na+, NH4 +, and NW4 + (wherein W is a Ci_4 alkyl group), and the like.
[00064] For therapeutic use, salts of the compounds of the present invention are
contemplated as being pharmaceutically acceptable. However, salts of acids and bases that are non-pharmaceutically acceptable may also find use, for example, in the preparation or purification of a pharmaceutically acceptable compound.
[00065] The term "sample" as used herein is used in its broadest sense. A sample suspected of indicating a condition characterized by the dysregulation of apoptotic function may comprise a cell, tissue, or fluids, chromosomes isolated from a cell (e.g., a spread of metaphase chromosomes), genomic DNA (in solution or bound to a solid support such as for Southern blot analysis), RNA (in solution or bound to a solid support such as for Northern blot analysis), cDNA (in solution or bound to a solid support) and the like. A sample suspected of containing a protein may comprise a cell, a portion of a tissue, an extract containing one or more proteins and the like.
[00066] As used herein, the terms "purified" or "to purify" refer to the removal of undesired components from a sample. As used herein, the term "substantially purified" refers to molecules that are at least 60% free, preferably 75% free, and most preferably 90%, or more, free from other components with which they usually associated.
[00067] The terms "specific binding" or "specifically binding" when used in reference to the interaction of an antibody and a protein or peptide means that the interaction is dependent upon the presence of a particular structure (i.e., the antigenic determinant or epitope) on the protein; in other words the antibody is recognizing and binding to a specific protein structure rather than to proteins in general. For example, if an antibody is specific for epitope "A," the presence of a protein containing epitope A (or free, unlabelled A) in a reaction containing labeled "A" and the antibody will reduce the amount of labeled A bound to the antibody.
[00068] As used herein, the terms "non-specific binding" and "background binding" when used in reference to the interaction of an antibody and a protein or peptide refer to an interaction that is not dependent on the presence of a particular structure (i.e., the antibody is binding to proteins in general rather that a particular structure such as an epitope).
[00069] As used herein, the term "modulate" refers to the activity of a compound (e.g., a compound of the present invention) to affect (e.g. , to promote or retard) an aspect of cellular function, including, but not limited to, cell growth, proliferation, apoptosis, and the like.
[00070] As used herein, the term "competes for binding" is used in reference to a first molecule (e.g. , a first compound of the present invention) with an activity that binds to the same target (e.g., the oligomycin sensitivity conferring protein in mitochondrial ATP synthase) as does a second molecule (e.g., a second compound of the present invention or other molecule that binds to the oligomycin sensitivity conferring protein in mitochondrial ATP synthase, etc.). The efficiency (e.g., kinetics or thermodynamics) of binding by the first molecule may be the same as, or greater than, or less than, the efficiency of the target binding to the second molecule. For example, the equilibrium binding constant (KQ) for binding to the substrate may be different for the two molecules.
[00071] The term "test compound" refers to any chemical entity, pharmaceutical, drug, and the like, that can be used to treat or prevent a disease, illness, sickness, or disorder of bodily function, or otherwise alter the physiological or cellular status of a sample (e.g., the level of dysregulation of apoptosis in a cell or tissue). Test compounds comprise both known and potential therapeutic compounds. A test compound can be determined to be therapeutic by using the screening methods of the present invention. A "known therapeutic compound" refers to a therapeutic compound that has been shown (e.g., through animal trials or prior experience with administration to humans) to be effective in such treatment or prevention. In some embodiments, "test compounds" are agents that modulate apoptosis in cells.
[00072] As a general matter, compositions specifying a percentage are by weight unless otherwise specified.
[00073] Further, if a variable is not accompanied by a definition, then the previous definition of the variable controls. Generic chemical structures are intended to encompass all stereoisomeric forms (e.g., racemic mixtures, enantiomers, diastereomers, etc.) unless indicated otherwise. From the description herein, it will be apparent to the skilled artisan that many specific examples are represented by the generic chemical formulae, definitions for variables associated with the generic chemical formulae, and, in certain embodiments, methods of using such compounds to treat various medicial disorders. To illustrate, in one example, X1 is CI and X2 is H in Formula I. Whereas, in another example, X1 is F and X2 is halogen in Formula I. A wide variety of such combinations arising from selecting a particular group at each substituent position are possible and all such combinations are within the scope of this invention.
Furthermore, use of particular families of compounds, e.g., a compound of Formula I, or, alternatively for example, a compound of Formula II, are contemplated for use in methods of treating one or more of the medical disorders described herein. To illustrate, in one example, a compound of Formula I is used in a method of treating rheumatoid arthritis. Whereas, in another example, a compound of Formula I is used in a method of treating graft- versus-host disease. Further combinations will be appreciated by the skilled artisan upon review of the description herein.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
[00074] The present invention relates to inhibitors of FiFo-ATPases (e.g., mitochondrial FiF0-ATPases) and their therapeutic use. In particular, the present invention provides benzodiazepinone compounds useful as FiF0-ATPase inhibitors, and methods of using such compounds as therapeutic agents to treat a number of different conditions.
[00075] Exemplary compositions and methods of the present invention are described in more detail in the following sections: I. Modulators of FiFo-ATPase Activity; II. 1 ,4- Benzodiazepinone Compounds; III. Therapeutic Applications of 1 ,4-Benzodiazepinone Compounds; and IV. Pharmaceutical Compositions, Formulations, and Exemplary Administration Routes and Dosing Considerations.
[00076] The practice of the present invention employs, unless otherwise indicated, conventional techniques of organic chemistry, pharmacology, molecular biology (including recombinant techniques), cell biology, biochemistry, and immunology, which are within the skill of the art. Such techniques are explained fully in the literature, such as "Comprehensive Organic Synthesis" (B.M. Trost & I. Fleming, eds., 1991-1992); "Molecular cloning: a laboratory manual" Second Edition (Sambrook et ah, 1989); "Oligonucleotide synthesis" (M.J. Gait, ed., 1984); "Animal cell culture" (R.I. Freshney, ed., 1987); the series "Methods in enzymology" (Academic Press, Inc.); "Handbook of experimental immunology" (D.M. Weir & C.C. Blackwell, eds.); "Gene transfer vectors for mammalian cells" (J.M. Miller & M.P. Calos, eds., 1987); "Current protocols in molecular biology" (F.M. Ausubel et ah, eds., 1987, and periodic updates); "PCR: the polymerase chain reaction" (Mullis et ah , eds., 1994); and "Current protocols in immunology" (J.E. Coligan et ah , eds., 1991), each of which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety.
I. Modulators of FiF0-ATPase Activity
[00077] In some embodiments, the present invention regulates FiF0-ATPase activity (e.g., mitochondrial FiFo-ATPase activity) through the exposure of cells to compounds of the present invention. In some embodiments, the compounds inhibit ATP synthesis and ATP hydrolysis. The effect of the compounds can be measured by detecting any number of cellular changes. For example, mitochondrial FiFo-ATPase activity and/or cell death may be assayed as described herein and in the art. In some embodiments, cell lines are maintained under appropriate cell culturing conditions {e.g. , gas (C02), temperature and media) for an appropriate period of time to attain exponential proliferation without density dependent constraints. Cell number and or viability are measured using standard techniques, such as trypan blue exclusion/hemo-cytometry, or a MTT dye conversion assay. Alternatively, the cell may be analyzed for the expression of genes or gene products associated with aberrations in apoptosis or necrosis.
[00078] In some embodiments, exposing the compounds of the present invention to a cell induces apoptosis. In some embodiments, the present invention induces apoptosis or arrest of cell proliferation through interacting with the mitochondrial FiFo-ATPase. In some
embodiments, the compounds of the present invention inhibit mitochondrial FiFo-ATPase activity through binding the OSCP. In some embodiments, the compounds of the present invention bind the junction between the OSCP and the Fi subunit of the mitochondrial FIFQ- ATPase. In some embodiments, the compounds of the present invention bind the Fi subunit. In certain embodiments, screening assays of the present invention permit detection of binding partners of the OSCP, Fl s or OSCP/ Fi junction.
[00079] In some embodiments, exposing a compound described herein to a cell induces apoptosis. In some embodiments, the compound causes an initial increase in cellular ROS levels (e.g., 02 ~). In further embodiments, exposure of the compound to a cell causes an increase in cellular 02 " levels. In still further embodiments, the increase in cellular 02 " levels resulting from the compound is detectable with a redox-sensitive agent that reacts specifically with 02 ~ (e.g., dihydroethidium (DHE)).
[00080] In other embodiments, increased cellular 02 ~ levels resulting from compounds described herein diminish after a period of time (e.g., 10 minutes). In other embodiments, increased cellular 02 ~ levels resulting from the compounds diminish after a period of time and increase again at a later time (e.g., 10 hours). In further embodiments, increased cellular 02 ~ levels resulting from the compounds diminish at 1 hour and increase again after 4 hours. In some embodiments, an early increase in cellular 02 ~ levels, followed by a diminishing in cellular 02 ~ levels, followed by another increase in cellular 02 ~ levels resulting from the compounds is due to different cellular processes (e.g., bimodal cellular mechanisms).
[00081] In some embodiments, a compound described herein causes a collapse of a cell's mitochondrial transmembrane potential (ΔΨιη). In some embodiments, a collapse of a cell's mitochondrial ΔΨι^ resulting from the compound is detectable with a mitochondria-selective potentiometric probe (e.g., 3,3 '-Dihexyloxacarbocyanine iodide, DiOC6). In further embodiments, a collapse of a cell's mitochondrial ΔΨιη resulting from the compound occurs after an initial increase in cellular 02 ~ levels.
[00082] In some embodiments, the present invention enables caspase activation. In other embodiments, a compound described herein causes the release of cytochrome c from mitochondria. In further embodiments, the compound alters cystolic cytochrome c levels. In still other embodiments, altered cystolic cytochrome c levels resulting from compound are detectable by immunoblotting cytosolic fractions. In some embodiments, diminished cystolic cytochrome c levels resulting from the compound are detectable after a period of time (e.g., 10 hours). In further preferred embodiments, diminished cystolic cytochrome c levels resulting from the compound are detectable after 5 hours.
[00083] In other embodiments, the present invention causes the opening of the mitochondrial permeability transition pore. In some embodiments, the cellular release of cytochrome c resulting from a compound described herein is consistent with a collapse of mitochondrial ΔΨιη. In still further preferred embodiments, the compound causes an increase in cellular 02 ~ levels after a mitochondrial ΔΨιη collapse and a release of cytochrome c. In further preferred embodiments, a rise in cellular 02 ~ levels is caused by a mitochondrial AxVm collapse and release of cytochrome c resulting from the compound.
[00084] In other embodiments, the present invention causes cellular caspase activation. In some embodiments, caspase activation resulting from a compound described herein is measurable with a pan-caspase sensitive fluorescent substrate (e.g., FAM-VAD-fmk). In still further embodiments, caspase activation resulting from the compound tracks with a collapse of mitochondrial ΔΨιη. In other embodiments, the compound causes an appearance of
hypodiploid DNA. In some embodiments, an appearance of hypodiploid DNA resulting from the compound is slightly delayed with respect to caspase activation.
[00085] In some embodiments, the molecular target for the present invention is found within mitochondria. In further embodiments, the molecular target of the present invention involves the mitochondrial ATPase. The primary sources of cellular ROS include redox enzymes and the mitochondrial respiratory chain (hereinafter MRC). In some embodiments, cytochrome c oxidase (complex IV of the MRC) inhibitors (e.g., NaN3) preclude a present invention dependent increase in cellular ROS levels. In other preferred embodiments, the ubiquinol- cytochrome c reductase component of MRC complex III inhibitors (e.g., FK506) preclude a present invention dependent increase in ROS levels.
[00086] In some embodiments, an increase in cellular ROS levels result from the binding of the compounds of the present invention to a target within mitochondria. In some embodiments, the compounds of the present invention oxidize 2',7'-dichlorodihydrofluorescin (hereinafter DCF) diacetate to DCF. DCF is a redox-active species capable of detecting ROS. In further embodiments, the rate of DCF production resulting from the present invention increases after a lag period.
[00087] Antimycin A generates 02 ~ by inhibiting ubiquinol-cytochrome c reductase. In some embodiments, the present invention provides compounds that increase cellular ROS and this ROS is believed to arise from ubiquinol-cytochrome c. In further embodiments, the present invention increases cellular ROS production under aerobic conditions supporting state 3 respiration. In further embodiments, the compounds of the present invention do not directly target the MPT pore. In additional embodiments, the compounds of the present invention do not generate substantial ROS in the subcellular S15 fraction (e.g., cytosol; microsomes). In even further embodiments, the compounds of the present invention do not stimulate ROS if mitochondria are in state 4 respiration. [00088] MRC complexes I - III are the primary sources of ROS within mitochondria. In some embodiments, the primary source of an increase in cellular ROS levels resulting from the compounds of the present invention emanates from these complexes as a result of inhibiting the FiFo-ATPase. Indeed, in still further embodiments, the present invention inhibits ATPase activity of bovine sub-mitochondrial particles (hereinafter SMPs). In particularly preferred embodiments, the compounds of the present invention bind to the OSCP component of the FiFo-ATPase.
[00089] Oligomycin is a macrolide natural product that binds to the FiF0- ATPase, induces a state 3 to 4 transition, and as a result, generates ROS (e.g., 02 ~). In some embodiments, the compounds of the present invention bind the OSCP component of the FiFo-ATPase. In some embodiments, the compounds of the present invention bind the junction between the OSCP and the Fi subunit of the FiF0-ATPase. In some embodiments, the compounds of the present invention bind the Fi subunit. In certain embodiments, screening assays of the present invention permit detection of binding partners of the OSCP, Fl s or OSCP/ Fi junction. OSCP is an intrinsically fluorescent protein. In certain embodiments, titrating a solution of test compounds of the present invention into an E. Coli sample overexpressing OSCP and/or an OSCP analog attached with a fluorescent label results in quenching of the intrinsic OSCP fluorescence. In other embodiments, fluorescent or radioactive test compounds can be used in direct binding assays. In other embodiments, competition binding experiments can be conducted. In this type of assay, test compounds are assessed for their ability to compete with a known binding compound for binding to, for example, the OSCP. In some embodiments, the compounds of the present invention cause an increase in cellular ROS levels and apoptosis in cells through regulation of the OSCP gene {e.g., altering expression of the OSCP gene). In further embodiments, the present invention functions by altering the molecular motions of the ATPase motor.
II. 1,4-Benzodiazepinone Compounds
[00090] In one aspect, the invention provides a family of compounds represented by Formula I:
Figure imgf000020_0001
I including a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
X1 is CI or F;
X2 is hydrogen, halogen, hydroxyl, methoxy, ethoxy, methyl, or R1 is hydrogen, C1-C3 alkyl, hydroxyethyl, or hydroxypropyl;
Figure imgf000021_0001
R3 and R4 are independently hydrogen, C1-C5 alkyl, or Z; provided that both R3 and R4 are not hydrogen, and provided that both R3 and R4 are not Z;
R5 represents independently for each occurrence halogen, trifluoromethyl, or C1-C5 alkyl;
R6 represents independently for each occurrence hydrogen or C1-C5 alkyl;
Z is Ci-C4alkylene-C02R6, Ci-C4alkylene-C(0)N(R6)2, or C C4alkyl substituted with
-OR6;
n is 1 or 2; and the stereochemical configuration at a stereocenter in a compound represented by Formula I is R, S, or a mixture thereof.
[00091] In certain embodiments, X1 is CI. In certain other embodiments, X1 is F. In certain embodiments, X2 is hydrogen or halogen. In certain other embodiments, X2 is hydrogen. In certain embodiments, R1 is other embodiments, R1 is C1-C3 alkyl. In
certain embodiments, R is
Figure imgf000021_0002
ertain other embodiments, R is
In certain embodiments, R3 and R4 are independently hydrogen or C1-C5 alkyl; provided that both R3 and R4 are not hydrogen. In certain other embodiments, R3 is hydrogen; and R4 is Ci- C5 alkyl or Z. In certain other embodiments, R3 is C1-C5 alkyl or Z; and R4 is hydrogen. In certain other embodiments, R3 is hydrogen; and R4 is methyl, ethyl or propyl. In certain other embodiments, R3 is methyl, ethyl or propyl; and R4 is hydrogen. In certain embodiments, R5 is halogen. In certain other embodiments, R5 is chloro. In certain other embodiments, R5 is chloro or fluoro. In certain embodiments, n is 1. In certain embodiments, n is 2. [00092] In certain embodiments, the com ound is represented by Formula IA:
Figure imgf000022_0001
including a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
R1 is hydrogen, methyl, or ethyl;
Figure imgf000022_0002
R3 and R4 are independently hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, or Z; provided that both R3 and R4 are not hydrogen, and provided that both R3 and R4 are not Z;
R5 represents independently for each occurrence CI or F;
Z is hydroxyethyl, hydroxylpropyl, or hydroxybutyl;
n is 1 or 2; and
the stereochemical configuration at a stereocenter in a compound represented by Formula IA is R, S, or a mixture thereof.
[00093]
Figure imgf000022_0003
are independently hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, or propyl; provided that both R3 and R4 are not hydrogen. In certain other embodiments, R3 is hydrogen; and R4 is methyl, ethyl or propyl. In certain other embodiments, R3 is methyl, ethyl or propyl; and R4 is hydrogen. In certain other
embodiments, R5 is CI, and n is 1. In certain embodiments, R2 is
Figure imgf000022_0004
[00094] In certain embodiments, the compound is represented by Formula IB:
Figure imgf000023_0001
IB
including a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
R1 is hydrogen or methyl; R2 is
Figure imgf000023_0002
R4 is methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl,
hydroxyethyl, hydroxylpropyl, or hydroxybutyl; R5 represents independently for each occurrence CI or F; n is 1 or 2; and the stereochemical configuration at a stereocenter in a compound represented by Formula IB is R, S, or a mixture thereof. In certain embodiments, R1 is hydrogen and n is 1. In certain embodiments, R1 is hydrogen, n is 1, and R4 is methyl, ethyl,
or propyl. In certain embodiments, R2 is
Figure imgf000023_0003
s and R4 is methyl, ethyl, or propyl.
[00095] In certain embodiments, the com ound is represented by Formula IC:
Figure imgf000023_0004
IC
including a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
Figure imgf000023_0005
hydroxyethyl, hydroxylpropyl, or hydroxybutyl; R5 represents independently for each occurrence CI or F; n is 1 or 2; and the stereochemical configuration at a stereocenter in a compound represented by Formula IC is R, S, or a mixture thereof. In certain embodiments, R1 is hydrogen and n is 1. In certain embodiments, R1 is hydrogen, n is 1 , and R3 is methyl, ethyl,
or propyl. In certain
Figure imgf000024_0001
, and RJ is methyl, ethyl, or propyl.
[00096] In another aspect, the invention provides a family of compounds represented by Formula II:
Figure imgf000024_0002
II including a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
X is hydrogen, halogen, hydroxyl, methoxy, ethoxy, methyl, or
R1 is hydrogen, C1-C3 alkyl, hydroxyethyl, or hydroxypropyl;
Figure imgf000024_0003
R3 represents independently for each occurrence halogen, trifluoromethyl, or C1-C5 alkyl; n is 1 or 2; and the stereochemical configuration at a stereocenter in a compound represented by Formula II is R, S, or a mixture thereof.
[00097] In certain embodiments, X is hydrogen. In certain embodiments, R1 is hydrogen 2 -C3 alkyl. In certain embodiments,
Figure imgf000024_0004
embodiments, R
Figure imgf000024_0005
. In certain embodiments, R3 is halogen. In certain other embodiments, R3 is CI. In certain embodiments, R3 is trifluoromethyl. In certain embodiments, n is 1. In certain other embodiments, R3 represents independently for each occurrence CI or F, and n is 2. [00098] In another aspect, the invention provides a family of compounds represented by Formula III:
Figure imgf000025_0001
III
including a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
X1 is CI, F, or -CF3;
X2 is hydrogen, halogen, hydroxyl, methoxy, ethoxy, methyl, or ethyl;
R1 is hydrogen, C1-C3 alkyl, hydroxyethyl, or hydroxypropyl;
R2 represents independently for each occurrence halogen, trifluoromethyl, or Ci-C3 alkyl;
R3 represents independently for each occurrence Ci-C3 alkyl, Ci-C4alkylene-C02R5, or Ci-C4alkylene-C(0)N(R5)2;
R4 is hydrogen or halogen;
R5 represents independently for each occurrence hydrogen or C1-C5 alkyl;
m and n are independently 1 or 2; and
the stereochemical configuration at a stereocenter in a compound represented by Formula III is R, S, or a mixture thereof.
[00099] In certain embodiments, X1 is CI. In certain other embodiments, X1 is F. In certain other embodiments, X1 is -CF3. In certain embodiments, X2 is hydrogen. In certain other embodiments, X2 is halogen. In certain embodiments, R1 is hydrogen. In certain other embodiments, R1 is Ci-C3 alkyl. In certain embodiments, R2 is trifluoromethyl. In certain embodiments, R2 is halogen. In certain other embodiments, R2 is CI or F. In certain embodiments, R3 is Ci-C3 alkyl. In certain other embodiments, R3 is methyl. In certain embodiments, R4 is hydrogen. In certain other embodiments, R4 is halogen. In certain other embodiments, R4 is fluoro or chloro. In certain embodiments, n is 1. In certain other embodiments, n is 2. In certain embodiments, m is 1. [000100] In certain embodiments, the invention provides a family of compounds represented by Formula IIIA:
Figure imgf000026_0001
IIIA
including a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein: X1 is CI, F, or CF3; R1 is hydrogen, C1-C3 alkyl, hydroxy ethyl, or hydroxypropyl; R2 represents independently for each occurrence halogen or trifluoromethyl; R3 is Ci-C3 alkyl; n is 1 or 2; and the stereochemical configuration at a stereocenter in a compound represented by Formula IIIA is R, S, or a mixture thereof. In certain embodiments, X1 is CI. In certain embodiments, R1 is hydrogen or Ci-C3 alkyl. In certain embodiments, R2 is chloro or fiuoro. In certain embodiments, R3 is methyl.
[000101] In certain other embodiments, the compound is one of the compounds listed in Tables 1-4 herein below, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of said compounds. It is understood that the foregoing compounds can be combined with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier to produce a pharmaceutical composition.
TABLE 1
Figure imgf000026_0002
Figure imgf000027_0001
Figure imgf000028_0001
Figure imgf000029_0001
TABLE 2
Figure imgf000030_0001
Figure imgf000031_0001
TABLE 3
Figure imgf000032_0001
Figure imgf000033_0001
Figure imgf000034_0001
[000102] In certain embodiments, the invention provides enantiomerically pure compounds. Exemplary enantiomerically pure compounds are provided in Table 4 below. TABLE 4
Figure imgf000035_0001
Figure imgf000036_0001
[000103] Methods for preparing 1 ,4-benzodiazepinone compounds described herein are illustrated in the following synthetic schemes. The schemes are given for the purpose of illustrating the invention, but not for limiting the scope or spirit of the invention. Consistent with this purpose, Schemes 1-3 show exemplary methods of preparing a benzodiazepine core. The starting material, e.g., 5-chloroisatoic anhydride (A), for these routes is commercially available or can be prepared based on procedures described in the literature.
[000104] The synthetic route illustrated in Scheme 1 involves combining isatoic anhydride A and an amino acid, such as glycine, in an organic solvent such as acetic acid and applying heat to facilitate the formation of benzodiazepine C. Functional groups can be added to the Nl- position of benzodiazepine C using standard alkylation chemistry described in the art. For example, amide protection of benzodiazepine C can be performed bv reactine the compound with a base, such as potassium tert-butoxide, followed by a benzyl bromide, such as p-methoxy benzylbromide. Introduction of other alkyl groups at the Nl -position can be performed at this stage. For example, a protected hydroxyethyl group can be installed at the Nl -position by reacting benzodiazepine C with 2-bromoethyl acetate in the presence of a base. Saponification of the acetate ester provides a hydroxyethyl group at the Nl -position.
Scheme 1
Figure imgf000037_0001
[000105] The synthetic route illustrated in Scheme 2 begins by installing a protecting group (e.g., /?-methoxybenzyl (PMB)) onto the nitrogen atom of the amide, or, alternatively, alkylating the nitrogen atom to install the substituent desired at this location of the
benzodiazepine final product. Alkylation of A to provide intermediate B may be carried out by treating A with an inorganic base, such as sodium carbonate or sodium hydride, and an alkyl or benzyl halide. A large number of alkyl halides and benzyl halides are known in the art and contemplated to be amenable to the synthetic route.
[000106] The second step illustrated in Scheme 2 involves combining isatoic anhydride B and an an amino acid, such as glycine in an organic solvent such as acetic acid or N,N- dimethylformamide, and heating the mixture to a temperature in the range of about 60-130 °C for about 12-36 hours. Alternatively, the condensation reaction may be performed in two steps. The first step involves combining an amino acid and isatoic anhydride B in a solvent such as pyridine or acetonitrile, with or without water, containing triethylamine at a temperature in the range of about 20-100 °C for approximately 12-18 hours followed by removing the solvents in vacuo. The second step involves addition of an organic solvent, such as acetic acid or N,N- dimethylformamide, and heating the mixture to a temperature in the range of about 80-130 °C for about 12-24 hours. Scheme 2
Figure imgf000038_0001
X = halogen .
[000107] The synthetic route in Scheme 3 illustrates a one-step process for constructing the benzodiazepine core and installing C3-functionality. The reaction involves combining an amino acid and an isatoic anhydride, such as A, in an organic solvent such as acetic acid or N,N-dimethylformamide, and heating the mixture to a temperature in the range of about 60-130 °C for about 12-36 hours. Alternatively, the condensation reaction may be performed in two steps. The first step involves combining an amino acid, such as a phenylalanine derivative, and an isatoic anhydride, in a solvent such as pyridine or acetonitrile, with or without water, containing triethylamine at a temperature in the range of about 20-100 °C for approximately 12-18 hours followed by removing the solvents in vacuo. The second step involves adding an organic solvent, such as acetic acid or N,N-dimethylformamide, and heating the mixture to a temperature in the range of about 80-130 °C for about 12-24 hours to provide intermediate H. Notably, a protecting group can be installed at the Nl -position by reacting intermediate H with a mild base and /?-methoxybenzyl (PMB) chloride.
Scheme 3
Figure imgf000038_0002
R" = mono- or di-halogen, alkyl, etc.
[000108] The next phase of the synthesis involves installing the C3 and/or C5 functional groups, as illustrated in Scheme 4. Treatment of compound C with a chlorinating agent, such as phosphoryl chloride in toluene buffered with N,N-dimethylaniline, provides imidoyl chloride D. This reaction is generally performed at elevated temperature (e.g. 90 °C) for several hours (e.g., 4-18 hours). Other chlorinating agents are known in the art and are contemplated to be amenable to the synthetic route.
[000109] Compound G can be prepared from compound D using either of the two synthetic strategies shown in Scheme 4. In the first approach, compound D is treated with a strong base, e.g., potassium tert-butoxide, and then a benzyl halide, to provide intermediate F. Imidoyl chloride F may be converted to compound G using Suzuki cross-coupling conditions employing a boronic acid or boronate ester coupling partner in the presence of an appropriate palladium catalyst. Exemplary Suzuki cross-coupling procedures are described by Nadin and co-workers. See Nadin et al. in J. Org. Chem. 2003, 68, 2844-2852. A large number of boron- containing reagents for use in Suzuki cross-coupling are known in the art and contemplated to be amenable to the synthetic route. However, boron-containing reagents that are not commercially available may be prepared from the requisite aryl halide (e.g., iodide or bromide) under standard conditions, e.g., by treatment with bis(pinacolato)diboron in hot 1,4-dioxane containing a catalytic amount of a palladium catalyst.
[000110] In the second approach, compound D is combined with a boronic acid or boronate ester coupling partner under Suzuki cross-coupling conditions to form intermediate E. Next, intermediate E is alkylated at the C3 -position to introduce a C3-aralkyl group. The alkylation step is carried out by treating intermediate E with a base, e.g., potassium tert-butoxide, at reduced temperature, e.g., -78 °C to -20 °C, followed by addition of a benzyl halide. A large number of benzyl halides are known in the art and contemplated to be amenable to the synthetic route. However, benzyl halides that are not commercially available may be prepared by one of several routes that will be familiar to one skilled in the art of organic synthesis: for example, reduction of a commercially available carboxylic acid (e.g., reduction using lithium aluminum hydride), formylation of an appropriate aromatic compound followed by reduction and conversion of the resulting alcohol to a halide in one step or two steps, such as via a sulfonate ester. Scheme 4
Figure imgf000040_0001
F
[000111] The Ari group installed at the C5-position during palladium-catalyzed cross coupling may be the substituent which appears in the final product, or it may be a precursor to the substituent at the C5-position in the final product. Scheme 5 illustrates preparation of an aryl boronic acid for use in a palladium-catalyzed cross coupling reaction to install the Ari group, where the installed Ari group serves as a precursor to the C5 -substituent in the final product. The required Suzuki coupling partner (boronate or boronic acid) can be prepared from readily available aryl bromides, such as 4-bromo-2-fluoro-l -nitrobenzene and 4-bromo-l-fluoro-2- nitrobenzene. Displacement of the fluorine atom with an alkyl amine occurs under SNAr conditions according to procedures described in the literature, and borylation at the bromine position can be performed using bis(pinacolato)diboron and a palladium catalyst according to standard conditions.
Scheme 5
Figure imgf000040_0002
Additional description of starting materials and synthetic procedures for preparing aryl boronate ester compounds are provided by Ishiyama et al. in J. Org. Chem. (1995) Vol. 60, page 7508, and GB 1363735. For example, 5-bromo-lH-benzo[d]imidazol-2(3H)-one can be prepared according to procedures in GB 1363735, and this bromobenzimidazolone can be converted to a boronate ester.
[000112] Scheme 6 illustrates installation of an Ari group at the C5-position and conversion of the Ari group to the C5-substituent that appears in the final product. A palladium-catalyzed cross-coupling reaction (e.g., Suzuki Reaction) is used to install the C5 aryl group onto the benzodiazepine core. Reduction of the nitro group to an amine using a reducing metal such as iron, or other standard nitro reducing conditions, is followed by cyclic urea formation using triphosgene or a related carbonyl donor reagent such as carbonyl-1,1 '-diimidazole. A final deprotection step can be used to remove the para-methoxybenzyl (PMB) group at Nl and the tert-butyldimethylsilyl (TBDMS) group protecting the hydroxy 1 group.
Scheme 6
Figure imgf000041_0001
[000113] The breadth of compounds that can be prepared by the procedures described above can be further expanded by modifying the functional groups attached to the C3-aralkyl group of compound G. For example, as illustrated in Scheme 7, it is contemplated that a halogen atom attached to the aralkyl group can be converted to an alkyl group using an alkyl Grignard reagent in the presence of an iron catalyst. Procedures for carrying out reactions of this type are known in the art. Scheme 7
Figure imgf000042_0001
R = alkyl or PMB
X is Br or I
[000114] In situations where compound G contains one or more protecting groups, the protecting groups can be removed using standard deprotection procedures known in the art. See, for example, Greene, T.W.; Wuts, P.G.M. Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 2nd ed.; Wiley: New York, 1991. For instance, removal of a nitrogen protecting group such as a p- methoxybenzyl (PMB) group at the -position may be performed using A1C13 or cerium ammonium nitrate (CAN). Similarly, demethylation or debenzylation of a phenolic ether in the Ari -group may be performed using BBr3, EtSH or A1C13 to provide phenols. Representative deprotection procedures are illustrated in Scheme 8.
Scheme 8
Figure imgf000042_0002
[000115] Additional synthetic procedures are described in detail in the examples below.
Further, additional synthetic procedures can be found in, for example, "Comprehensive Organic Synthesis" (B.M. Trost & I. Fleming, eds., 1991-1992); Carey, F.A. and Sundberg, R. J.
Advanced Organic Chemistry Part B: Reactions and Synthesis, 3rd Ed.; Plenum Press: New York, 1990; J. March, Advanced Organic Chemistry, McGraw Hill Book Company, New York, (1992, 4th edition); US Patent Application Publication No. 2008/112553; and International Application Publication No. WO2009/061916; each of which is hereby incorporated by reference.
III. Therapeutic Applications of 1,4-Benzodiazepinone Compounds
[000116] It is contemplated that the 1 ,4-benzodiazepinone compounds of Formulae I, II, and III and related 1 ,4-benzodiazepinone compounds, provide therapeutic benefits to patients suffering from any one or more of a number of conditions, e.g., diseases characterized by dysregulation of FiF0-ATPase activity, diseases characterized by dysregulation of necrosis and/or apoptosis processes in a cell or tissue, disease characterized by aberrant cell growth and/or hyperproliferation. The compounds described herein can also be used to treat a variety of dysregulatory disorders related to cellular death as described elsewhere herein. Additionally, the compounds described herein can be used to inhibit both ATP synthesis and hydrolysis.
[000117] A large number of diseases can be treated using the 1 ,4-benzodiazepinone compounds described herein. For example, the compounds described herein can be used to treat diseases characterized by dysregulation of necrosis and/or apoptosis processes in a cell or tissue, diseases characterized by aberrant cell growth and/or hyperproliferation, etc., or lupus, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, graft-versus-host disease, Crohn's disease, inflammatory bowel disease, multiple sclerosis, epidermal hyperplasia, cardiovascular disease, myeloma, lymphoma, cancer, and bacterial infection. Although not wishing to be bound to a particular theory, it is believed that the compounds impart therapeutic benefit by modulating (e.g., inhibiting or promoting) the activity of the FiF0-ATPase complexes (e.g., mitochondrial FiF0- ATPase complexes) in affected cells or tissues. In some embodiments, the compositions of the present invention are used to treat immune/chronic inflammatory conditions (e.g., psoriasis, autoimmune disorders, organ-transplant rejection, and epidermal hyperplasia). In further embodiments, the compositions of the present invention are used in conjunction with stenosis therapy to treat compromised (e.g., occluded) vessels.
[000118] In certain embodiments, a composition comprising a 1 ,4-benzodiazepinone compound is administered under conditions (e.g., timing, dose, co-administration with other agent, mode of administration, selection of subject, use of targeting agents, etc.) that maximize desired effects directed at the FiF0- ATPase.
[000119] In certain embodiments, the invention provides a method of treating a disorder selected from the group consisting of rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, graft-versus-host disease, Crohn's disease, inflammatory bowel disease, multiple sclerosis, psoriasis, systemic lupus erythematosus, Celiac Sprue, idiopathic thrombocytopenic thrombotic purpura, myasthenia gravis, Sjogren's syndrome, scleroderma, ulcerative colitis, asthma, epidermal hyperplasia, cardiovascular disease, myeloma, lymphoma, cancer, and bacterial infection, comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula I, II, or III to a patient in need thereof to ameliorate a symptom of the disorder, wherein the definition of Formula I, II, and III are as provided above.
[000120] In certain embodiments, said compound is one of the compounds listed in Tables 1- 4. In certain embodiments, said compound is one of the compounds listed in Table 1.
[000121] In certain embodiments, the disorder is Crohn's disease, inflammatory bowel disease, multiple sclerosis, graft-versus-host disease, lupus, rheumatoid arthritis, or psoriasis. In certain embodiments, the disorder is rheumatoid arthritis, graft-versus-host disease, or inflammatory bowel disease. In certain other embodiments, the disorder is Crohn's disease, inflammatory bowel disease, multiple sclerosis, graft-versus-host disease, systemic lupus erythematosus, rheumatoid arthritis, or psoriasis. In certain other embodiments, the disorder is cardiovascular disease, myeloma, lymphoma, or cancer. In certain other embodiments, the disorder is systemic lupus erythematosus, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, graft-versus-host disease, myeloma, or lymphoma. In certain other embodiments, the disorder is cardiovascular disease or cancer. In certain other embodiments, the disorder is Crohn's disease, inflammatory bowel disease, or multiple sclerosis. In certain other embodiments, the disorder is graft-versus- host disease. In further embodiments, the disorder is a bacterial infection. In certain embodiments, the patient is a human.
[000122] Additionally, the 1 ,4-benzodiazepinone compounds described herein can be used in combination with at least one other therapeutic agent, such as Bz-423 (a benzodiazepine compound as described in U.S. Patent Nos. 7,144,880 and 7,125,866, U.S. Patent Application Serial Nos. 12/044,589, 11/586,097, 11/585,492, 11/445,010, 11/324,419, 11/176,719,
11/110,228, 10/935,333, 10/886,450, 10/795,535, 10/634,114, 10/427, 211, 10/217,878, and 09/767,283, and U.S. Provisional Patent Nos. 60/878,519, 60/812,270, 60/802,394, 60/732,045, 60/730,711, 60/704,102, 60/686,348, 60/641,040, 60/607,599, 60/565,788), potassium channel openers, calcium channel blockers, sodium hydrogen exchanger inhibitors, antiarrhythmic agents, antiatherosclerotic agents, anticoagulants, antithrombotic agents, prothrombolytic agents, fibrinogen antagonists, diuretics, antihypertensive agents, ATPase inhibitors, mineralocorticoid receptor antagonists, phospodiesterase inhibitors, antidiabetic agents, antiinflammatory agents, antioxidants, angiogenesis modulators, antiosteoporosis agents, hormone replacement therapies, hormone receptor modulators, oral contraceptives, antiobesity agents, antidepressants, antianxiety agents, antipsychotic agents, antiproliferative agents, antitumor agents, antiulcer and gastroesophageal reflux disease agents, growth hormone agents and/or growth hormone secretagogues, thyroid mimetics, anti-infective agents, antiviral agents, antibacterial agents, antifungal agents, cholesterol/lipid lowering agents and lipid profile therapies, and agents that mimic ischemic preconditioning and/or myocardial stunning, antiatherosclerotic agents, anticoagulants, antithrombotic agents, antihypertensive agents, antidiabetic agents, and antihypertensive agents selected from ACE inhibitors, AT-1 receptor antagonists, ET receptor antagonists, dual ET/AII receptor antagonists, and vasopepsidase inhibitors, or an antiplatelet agent selected from GPIIb/IIIa blockers, P2Yi and P2Yi2 antagonists, thromboxane receptor antagonists, and aspirin) in along with a pharmaceutically- acceptable carrier or diluent in a pharmaceutical composition.
[000123] Additionally, any one or more of these compounds can be used to treat a FiF0-ATP hydrolase associated disorder (e.g., myocardial infarction, ventricular hypertrophy, coronary artery disease, non-Q wave MI, congestive heart failure, cardiac arrhythmias, unstable angina, chronic stable angina, Prinzmetal's angina, high blood pressure, intermittent claudication, peripheral occlusive arterial disease, thrombotic or thromboembolic symptoms of
thromboembolic stroke, venous thrombosis, arterial thrombosis, cerebral thrombosis, pulmonary embolism, cerebral embolism, thrombophilia, disseminated intravascular coagulation, restenosis, atrial fibrillation, ventricular enlargement, atherosclerotic vascular disease, atherosclerotic plaque rupture, atherosclerotic plaque formation, transplant
atherosclerosis, vascular remodeling atherosclerosis, cancer, surgery, inflammation, systematic infection, artificial surfaces, interventional cardiology, immobility, medication, pregnancy and fetal loss, and diabetic complications comprising retinopathy, nephropathy and neuropathy) in a patient.
[000124] As indicated above, the 1 ,4-benzodiazepinone compounds described herein can be used in the treatment of a bacterial infection. A variety of bacteria are contemplated to be susceptible to the benzodiazepinone compounds. Representative bacteria include
Staphylococci species, e.g., S. aureus; Enterococci species, e.g., E.faecalis and E.faecium;
Streptococci species, e.g., S. pyogenes and S. pneumoniae; Escherichia species, e.g., E. coli, including enterotoxigenic, enteropathogenic, enteroinvasive, enterohemorrhagic and enteroaggregative E. coli strains; Haemophilus species, e.g., H. influenza; and Moraxella species, e.g., M. catarrhalis. Other examples include Mycobacteria species, e.g., M.
tuberculosis, M. avian-intracellular e, M. kansasii, M. bovis, M. africanum, M. genavense, M. leprae, M. xenopi, M. simiae, M. scrofulaceum, M. malmoense, M. celatum, M. abscessus, M. chelonae, M. szulgai, M. gordonae, M. haemophilum, M.fortuni and M. marinum;
Corynebacteria species, e.g., C. diphtheriae; Vibrio species, e.g., V. cholerae; Campylobacter species, e.g., C. jejuni; Helicobacter species, e.g., H. pylori; Pseudomonas species, e.g., P. aeruginosa; Legionella species, e.g., L. pneumophila; Treponema species, e.g., T. pallidum; Borrelia species, e.g., B. burgdorferi; Listeria species, e.g., L monocytogenes; Bacillus species, e.g., B. cereus; Bordatella species, e.g., B. pertussis; Clostridium species, e.g., C. perfringens, C. tetani, C. difficile and C. botulinum; Neisseria species, e.g., N. meningitidis and N.
gonorrhoeae; Chlamydia species, e.g., C. psittaci, C. pneumoniae and C. trachomatis;
Rickettsia species, e.g., R. rickettsii and ?. prowazekii; Shigella species, e.g., S. sonnei;
Salmonella species, e.g., S. typhimurium; Yersinia species, e.g., Y. enterocolitica and Y.
pseudotuberculosis; Klebsiella species, e.g., K. pneumoniae; Mycoplasma species, e.g., M. pneumoniae; and Trypanosoma brucei. In certain embodiments, the benzodiazepinone compounds described herein are used to treat a subject suffering from a bacterial infection selected from the group consisting of S. aureus, E.faecalis, E.faecium, S. pyogenes, S.
pneumonia, and P. aeruginosa. In certain embodiments, the benzodiazepinone compounds described herein are used to treat a subject suffering from a Trypanosoma brucei infection.
[000125] The antibacterial activity of the compounds described herein may be evaluated using standard assays known in the art, such as the microbroth dilution minimum inhibition concentration (MIC) assay, as further described in National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing; Fourteenth Informational Supplement. NCCLS document Ml 00-S 14 {ISBN 1 -56238-516-X} . This assay may be used to determine the minimum concentration of a compound necessary to prevent visible bacterial growth in a solution. In general, the drug to be tested is serially diluted into wells, and aliquots of liquid bacterial culture are added. This mixture is incubated under appropriate conditions, and then tested for growth of the bacteria. Compounds with low or no antibiotic activity (a high MIC) will allow growth at high concentrations of compound, while compounds with high antibiotic activity will allow bacterial growth only at lower
concentrations (a low MIC).
[000126] The assay uses stock bacterial culture conditions appropriate for the chosen strain of bacteria. Stock cultures from the permanent stock culture collection can be stored as frozen suspensions at -70°C. Cultures may be suspended in 10% skim milk (BD) prior to snap freezing in dry ice/ethanol and then placed in a -70°C freezer. Cultures may be maintained on Tryptic Soy Agar containing 5% Sheep Blood at room temperature (20°C), and each culture may be recovered from frozen form and transferred an additional time before MIC testing. Fresh plates are inoculated the day before testing, incubated overnight, and checked to confirm purity and identity. [000127] The identity and purity of the cultures recovered from the stock culture can be confirmed to rule out the possibility of contamination. The identity of the strains may be confirmed by standard microbiological methods (See, e.g., Murray et al., Manual of Clinical Microbiology, Eighth Edition. ASM Press {ISBN 1-55581-255-4}). In general, cultures are streaked onto appropriate agar plates for visualization of purity, expected colony morphology, and hemolytic patterns. Gram stains can also be utilized. The identities are confirmed using a MicroScan WalkAway 40 SI Instrument (Dade Behring, West Sacramento, California). This device utilizes an automated incubator, reader, and computer to assess for identification purposes the biochemical reactions carried out by each organism. The MicroScan WalkAway can also be used to determine a preliminary MIC, which may be confirmed using the method described below.
[000128] Frozen stock cultures may be used as the initial source of organisms for performing microbroth dilution minimum inhibition concentration (MIC) testing. Stock cultures are passed on their standard growth medium for at least 1 growth cycle (18-24 hours) prior to their use. Most bacteria may be prepared directly from agar plates in 10 mL aliquots of the appropriate broth medium. Bacterial cultures are adjusted to the opacity of a 0.5 McFarland Standard (optical density value of 0.28-0.33 on a Perkin-Elmer Lambda EZ150 Spectrophotometer, Wellesley, Massachusetts, set at a wavelength of 600nm). The adjusted cultures are then diluted 400 fold (0.25 mL inoculum + 100 mL broth) in growth media to produce a starting suspension of approximately 5 x 105 colony forming units (CFU)/mL. Most bacterial strains may be tested in cation adjusted Mueller Hinton Broth (CAMHB).
[000129] Test compounds ("drugs") are solubilized in a solvent suitable for the assay, such as DMSO. Drug stock solutions may be prepared on the day of testing. Microbroth dilution stock plates may be prepared in two dilution series, 64 to 0.06 μg drug/mL and 0.25 to 0.00025 μg drug/mL. For the high concentration series, 200 of stock solution (2 mg/mL) is added to duplicate rows of a 96-well microtiter plate. This is used as the first well in the dilution series. Serial two-fold decremental dilutions are made using a BioMek FX robot (Beckman Coulter Inc., Fullerton, CA) with 10 of the remaining 11 wells, each of which will contain 100
Figure imgf000047_0001
of the appropriate solvent/diluent. Row 12 contains solvent/diluent only and serves as the control. For the first well of the low concentration series, 200 μΐ, of an 8 μg/mL stock are added to duplicate rows of a 96-well plate. Serial two-fold dilutions are made as described above.
[000130] Daughter 96-well plates may be spotted (3.2 μΕΛνεΙΙ) from the stock plates listed above using the BioMek FX robot and used immediately or frozen at -70°C until use. Aerobic organisms are inoculated (100 μΐ^ volumes) into the thawed plates using the BioMek FX robot. The inoculated plates are be placed in stacks and covered with an empty plate. These plates are then incubated for 16 to 24 hours in ambient atmosphere according to CLSI guidelines
(National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards, Methods for Dilution, Antimicrobial Tests for Bacteria that Grow Aerobically; Approved Standard-Sixth Edition. NCCLS document M7-A6 {ISBN 1-56238-486-4}).
[000131] After inoculation and incubation, the degree of bacterial growth can be estimated visually with the aid of a Test Reading Mirror (Dynex Technologies 220 16) in a darkened room with a single light shining directly through the top of the microbroth tray. The MIC is the lowest concentration of drug that prevents macroscopically visible growth under the conditions of the test.
IV. Pharmaceutical Compositions, Formulations, and Exemplary
Administration Routes and Dosing Considerations
[000132] Exemplary embodiments of various contemplated medicaments and pharmaceutical compositions are provided below.
A. Preparing Medicaments
[000133] The compounds of the present invention are useful in the preparation of
medicaments to treat or study a variety of conditions associated with dysregulation of cell death, aberrant cell growth and hyperproliferation.
[000134] In addition, the compounds are also useful for preparing medicaments for treating or studying other disorders wherein the effectiveness of the compounds are known or predicted. Such disorders include, but are not limited to, neurological (e.g., epilepsy) or neuromuscular disorders. The methods and techniques for preparing medicaments of a compound of the present invention are well-known in the art. Exemplary pharmaceutical formulations and routes of delivery are described below. [000135] One of skill in the art will appreciate that any one or more of the compounds described herein, including the many specific embodiments, are prepared by applying standard pharmaceutical manufacturing procedures. Such medicaments can be delivered to the subject by using delivery methods that are well-known in the pharmaceutical arts.
B. Exemplary Pharmaceutical Compositions and Formulation [000136] In some embodiments of the present invention, the compositions are administered alone, while in some other embodiments, the compositions are preferably present in a pharmaceutical formulation comprising at least one active ingredient/agent, as discussed above, together with a solid support or alternatively, together with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers and optionally other therapeutic agents (e.g., those described in section III hereinabove). Each carrier should be "acceptable" in the sense that it is compatible with the other ingredients of the formulation and not injurious to the subject.
[000137] Contemplated formulations include those suitable for oral, rectal, nasal, topical (including transdermal, buccal and sublingual), vaginal, parenteral (including subcutaneous, intramuscular, intravenous and intradermal) and pulmonary administration. In some embodiments, formulations are conveniently presented in unit dosage form and are prepared by any method known in the art of pharmacy. Such methods include the step of bringing into association the active ingredient with the carrier which constitutes one or more accessory ingredients. In general, the formulations are prepared by uniformly and intimately bringing into association (e.g. , mixing) the active ingredient with liquid carriers or finely divided solid carriers or both, and then if necessary shaping the product.
[000138] Formulations of the present invention suitable for oral administration may be presented as discrete units such as capsules, cachets or tablets, wherein each preferably contains a predetermined amount of the active ingredient; as a powder or granules; as a solution or suspension in an aqueous or non-aqueous liquid; or as an oil-in-water liquid emulsion or a water-in-oil liquid emulsion. In other embodiments, the active ingredient is presented as a bolus, electuary, or paste, etc.
[000139] In some embodiments, tablets comprise at least one active ingredient and optionally one or more accessory agents/carriers are made by compressing or molding the respective agents. In some embodiments, compressed tablets are prepared by compressing in a suitable machine the active ingredient in a free-flowing form such as a powder or granules, optionally mixed with a binder (e.g., povidone, gelatin, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose), lubricant, inert diluent, preservative, disintegrant (e.g. , sodium starch glycolate, cross-linked povidone, cross- linked sodium carboxymethyl cellulose) surface-active or dispersing agent. Molded tablets are made by molding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered compound (e.g., active ingredient) moistened with an inert liquid diluent. Tablets may optionally be coated or scored and may be formulated so as to provide slow or controlled release of the active ingredient therein using, for example, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose in varying proportions to provide the desired release profile. Tablets may optionally be provided with an enteric coating, to provide release in parts of the gut other than the stomach.
[000140] Formulations suitable for topical administration in the mouth include lozenges comprising the active ingredient in a flavored basis, usually sucrose and acacia or tragacanth; pastilles comprising the active ingredient in an inert basis such as gelatin and glycerin, or sucrose and acacia; and mouthwashes comprising the active ingredient in a suitable liquid carrier.
[000141] Pharmaceutical compositions for topical administration according to the present invention are optionally formulated as ointments, creams, suspensions, lotions, powders, solutions, pastes, gels, sprays, aerosols or oils. In alternative embodiments, topical
formulations comprise patches or dressings such as a bandage or adhesive plasters impregnated with active ingredient(s), and optionally one or more excipients or diluents. In some embodiments, the topical formulations include a compound(s) that enhances absorption or penetration of the active agent(s) through the skin or other affected areas. Examples of such dermal penetration enhancers include dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO) and related analogues.
[000142] If desired, the aqueous phase of a cream base includes, for example, at least about 30% w/w of a polyhydric alcohol, i.e., an alcohol having two or more hydroxyl groups such as propylene glycol, butane-l,3-diol, mannitol, sorbitol, glycerol and polyethylene glycol and mixtures thereof.
[000143] In some embodiments, oily phase emulsions of this invention are constituted from known ingredients in a known manner. This phase typically comprises a lone emulsifier (otherwise known as an emulgent), it is also desirable in some embodiments for this phase to further comprise a mixture of at least one emulsifier with a fat or an oil or with both a fat and an oil.
[000144] Preferably, a hydrophilic emulsifier is included together with a lipophilic emulsifier so as to act as a stabilizer. In some embodiments it is also preferable to include both an oil and a fat. Together, the emulsifier(s) with or without stabilizer(s) make up the so-called
emulsifying wax, and the wax together with the oil and/or fat make up the so-called
emulsifying ointment base which forms the oily dispersed phase of the cream formulations.
[000145] Emulgents and emulsion stabilizers suitable for use in the formulation of the present invention include Tween 60, Span 80, cetostearyl alcohol, myristyl alcohol, glyceryl monostearate and sodium lauryl sulfate.
[000146] The choice of suitable oils or fats for the formulation is based on achieving the desired properties (e.g., cosmetic properties), since the solubility of the active compound/agent in most oils likely to be used in pharmaceutical emulsion formulations is very low. Thus creams should preferably be non-greasy, non-staining and washable products with suitable consistency to avoid leakage from tubes or other containers. Straight or branched chain, mono- or dibasic alkyl esters such as di-isoadipate, isocetyl stearate, propylene glycol diester of coconut fatty acids, isopropyl myristate, decyl oleate, isopropyl palmitate, butyl stearate, 2- ethylhexyl palmitate or a blend of branched chain esters known as Crodamol CAP may be used, the last three being preferred esters. These may be used alone or in combination depending on the properties required. Alternatively, high melting point lipids such as white soft paraffin and/or liquid paraffin or other mineral oils can be used.
[000147] Formulations suitable for topical administration to the eye also include eye drops wherein the active ingredient is dissolved or suspended in a suitable carrier, especially an aqueous solvent for the agent.
[000148] Formulations for rectal administration may be presented as a suppository with suitable base comprising, for example, cocoa butter or a salicylate.
[000149] Formulations suitable for vaginal administration may be presented as pessaries, creams, gels, pastes, foams or spray formulations containing in addition to the agent, such carriers as are known in the art to be appropriate.
[000150] Formulations suitable for nasal administration, wherein the carrier is a solid, include coarse powders having a particle size, for example, in the range of about 20 to about 500 microns which are administered in the manner in which snuff is taken, i.e., by rapid inhalation {e.g. , forced) through the nasal passage from a container of the powder held close up to the nose. Other suitable formulations wherein the carrier is a liquid for administration include, but are not limited to, nasal sprays, drops, or aerosols by nebulizer, and include aqueous or oily solutions of the agents.
[000151] Formulations suitable for parenteral administration include aqueous and non-aqueous isotonic sterile injection solutions which may contain antioxidants, buffers, bacteriostats and solutes which render the formulation isotonic with the blood of the intended recipient; and aqueous and non-aqueous sterile suspensions which may include suspending agents and thickening agents, and liposomes or other microparticulate systems which are designed to target the compound to blood components or one or more organs. In some embodiments, the formulations are presented/formulated in unit-dose or multi-dose sealed containers, for example, ampoules and vials, and may be stored in a freeze-dried (lyophilized) condition requiring only the addition of the sterile liquid carrier, for example water for injections, immediately prior to use. Extemporaneous injection solutions and suspensions may be prepared from sterile powders, granules and tablets of the kind previously described.
[000152] Preferred unit dosage formulations are those containing a daily dose or unit, daily subdose, as herein above -recited, or an appropriate fraction thereof, of an agent. [000153] It should be understood that in addition to the ingredients particularly mentioned above, the formulations of this invention may include other agents conventional in the art having regard to the type of formulation in question, for example, those suitable for oral administration may include such further agents as sweeteners, thickeners and flavoring agents. It also is intended that the agents, compositions and methods of this invention be combined with other suitable compositions and therapies. Still other formulations optionally include food additives (suitable sweeteners, flavorings, colorings, etc.), phytonutrients {e.g., flax seed oil), minerals {e.g., Ca, Fe, K, etc.), vitamins, and other acceptable compositions {e.g., conjugated linoelic acid), extenders, and stabilizers, etc.
C. Exemplary Administration Routes and Dosing Considerations
[000154] Various delivery systems are known and can be used to administer therapeutic agents {e.g., exemplary compounds as described above) of the present invention, e.g., encapsulation in liposomes, microparticles, microcapsules, receptor-mediated endocytosis, and the like.
Methods of delivery include, but are not limited to, intra-arterial, intra-muscular, intravenous, intranasal, and oral routes. In specific embodiments, it may be desirable to administer the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention locally to the area in need of treatment; this may be achieved by, for example, and not by way of limitation, local infusion during surgery, injection, or by means of a catheter.
[000155] The agents identified can be administered to subjects or individuals susceptible to or at risk of developing pathological growth of target cells and correlated conditions. When the agent is administered to a subject such as a mouse, a rat or a human patient, the agent can be added to a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and systemically or topically administered to the subject. To identify patients that can be beneficially treated, a tissue sample is removed from the patient and the cells are assayed for sensitivity to the agent.
[000156] Therapeutic amounts are empirically determined and vary with the pathology being treated, the subject being treated and the efficacy and toxicity of the agent. When delivered to an animal, the method is useful to further confirm efficacy of the agent. One example of an animal model is MLR/MpJ-lpr/lpr ("MLR-//?r") (available from Jackson Laboratories, Bar Harbor, Maine ). MLR-lpr mice develop systemic autoimmune disease. Alternatively, other animal models can be developed by inducing tumor growth, for example, by subcutaneously inoculating nude mice with about 105 to about 109 hyperproliferative, cancer or target cells as defined herein. When the tumor is established, the compounds described herein are
administered, for example, by subcutaneous injection around the tumor. Tumor measurements to determine reduction of tumor size are made in two dimensions using venier calipers twice a week. Other animal models may also be employed as appropriate. Such animal models for the above-described diseases and conditions are well-known in the art.
[000157] In some embodiments, in vivo administration is effected in one dose, continuously or intermittently throughout the course of treatment. Methods of determining the most effective means and dosage of administration are well known to those of skill in the art and vary with the composition used for therapy, the purpose of the therapy, the target cell being treated, and the subject being treated. Single or multiple administrations are carried out with the dose level and pattern being selected by the treating physician.
[000158] Suitable dosage formulations and methods of administering the agents are readily determined by those of skill in the art. Preferably, the compounds are administered at about 0.01 mg/kg to about 200 mg/kg, more preferably at about 0.1 mg/kg to about 100 mg/kg, even more preferably at about 0.5 mg/kg to about 50 mg/kg. When the compounds described herein are co-administered with another agent {e.g., as sensitizing agents), the effective amount may be less than when the agent is used alone.
[000159] The pharmaceutical compositions can be administered orally, intranasally, parenterally or by inhalation therapy, and may take the form of tablets, lozenges, granules, capsules, pills, ampoules, suppositories or aerosol form. They may also take the form of suspensions, solutions and emulsions of the active ingredient in aqueous or non-aqueous diluents, syrups, granulates or powders. In addition to an agent of the present invention, the pharmaceutical compositions can also contain other pharmaceutically active compounds or a plurality of compounds of the invention.
[000160] More particularly, an agent of the present invention also referred to herein as the active ingredient, may be administered for therapy by any suitable route including, but not limited to, oral, rectal, nasal, topical (including, but not limited to, transdermal, aerosol, buccal and sublingual), vaginal, parental (including, but not limited to, subcutaneous, intramuscular, intravenous and intradermal) and pulmonary. It is also appreciated that the preferred route varies with the condition and age of the recipient, and the disease being treated.
[000161] Ideally, the agent should be administered to achieve peak concentrations of the active compound at sites of disease. This may be achieved, for example, by the intravenous injection of the agent, optionally in saline, or by oral administration, for example, as a tablet, capsule or syrup containing the active ingredient.
[000162] Desirable blood levels of the agent may be maintained by a continuous infusion to provide a therapeutic amount of the active ingredient within disease tissue. The use of operative combinations is contemplated to provide therapeutic combinations requiring a lower total dosage of each component antiviral agent than may be required when each individual therapeutic compound or drug is used alone, thereby reducing adverse effects.
D. Exemplary Co-administration Routes and Dosing Considerations
[000163] The invention also includes methods involving co-administration of the compounds described herein with one or more additional active agents. Indeed, it is a further aspect of this invention to provide methods for enhancing prior art therapies and/or pharmaceutical compositions by co-administering a compound of this invention. In co-administration procedures, the agents may be administered concurrently or sequentially. In one embodiment, the compounds described herein are administered prior to the other active agent(s). The pharmaceutical formulations and modes of administration may be any of those described above. In addition, the two or more co-administered chemical agents, biological agents or radiation may each be administered using different modes or different formulations.
[000164] The agent or agents to be co-administered depend on the type of condition being treated. For example, when the condition being treated is cancer, the additional agent can be a chemotherapeutic agent or radiation. When the condition being treated is an immune disorder, the additional agent can be an immunosuppressant or an anti-inflammatory agent. When the condition being treated is chronic inflammation, the additional agent can be an antiinflammatory agent. The additional agents to be co-administered, such as anticancer, immunosuppressant, anti-inflammatory, can be any of the well-known agents in the art, including, but not limited to, those that are currently in clinical use. The determination of appropriate type and dosage of radiation treatment is also within the skill in the art or can be determined with relative ease.
[000165] Treatment of the various conditions associated with abnormal apoptosis is generally limited by the following two major factors: (1) the development of drug resistance and (2) the toxicity of known therapeutic agents. In certain cancers, for example, resistance to chemicals and radiation therapy has been shown to be associated with inhibition of apoptosis. Some therapeutic agents have deleterious side effects, including non-specific lymphotoxicity, renal and bone marrow toxicity.
[000166] The methods described herein address both these problems. Drug resistance, where increasing dosages are required to achieve therapeutic benefit, is overcome by co-administering the compounds described herein with the known agent. The compounds described herein sensitize target cells to known agents (and vice versa) and, accordingly, less of these agents are needed to achieve a therapeutic benefit. [000167] The sensitizing function of the claimed compounds also addresses the problems associated with toxic effects of known therapeutics. In instances where the known agent is toxic, it is desirable to limit the dosages administered in all cases, and particularly in those cases where drug resistance has increased the requisite dosage. When the claimed compounds are co-administered with the known agent, they reduce the dosage required which, in turn, reduces the deleterious effects.
EXAMPLES
[000168] The invention now being generally described, will be more readily understood by reference to the following examples, which are included merely for purposes of illustration of certain aspects and embodiments of the present invention, and are not intended to limit the invention.
Example 1
Representative General Procedures for Synthesis of a Benzodiazepine Core Containing a C7- Chloro Group.
Part I:
Figure imgf000055_0001
[000169] 6-Chloro-l-methyl-lH-benzo[d] [l,3]oxazine-2,4-dione. In a 3 L, 3 neck RBF equipped with mechanical stir, addition funnel, thermocouple and N2 inlet, NaH (30.4 g) was suspended in anhydrous THF (400 mL). While stirring at room temperature, a suspension of 5- chloroisatoic anhydride in THF (400 mL) was added in portion- wise manner over 45 min. The reaction mixture was stirred for 50 min (reaction temperature went up from 18 to 28 °C). To this was added CH3I (285 g, 125 mL) over 15 min. The mixture was then stirred at 42 °C for 16 h. Because TLC showed that some unreacted starting material was still present in the reaction mixture, an additional 30 mL of CH3I was added and the reaction mixture stirred at 42 °C for an additional 3 h. Reaction mixture was cooled (RT) and quenched by the slow (40 min) addition of AcOH (55 mL). Reaction mixture was concentrated to give 275 g thick syrupy product, which was used without any further purification. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ 3.35 (s, 3 H), 7.54 (d, 1 H), 7.85 (d, 1 H), 7.90 (s, 1 H).
Figure imgf000056_0001
[000170] 6-Chloro-l-methyl-lH-benzo[d] [l,3]oxazine-2,4-dione. 6-Chloro- lHbenzo[d][l ,3]oxazine-2,4-dione (22.88 g, 1 16 mmol) was dissolved in dimethylformamide (150 mL), and sodium carbonate (14.73 g, 139 mmol) was added. Methyl iodide (10.86 mL, 174 mmol) was then added dropwise. The reaction was stirred at room temperature overnight. Water (150 mL) was then added, and the mixture was stirred for 1 hour. The solid was collected by filtration. The impure solid was sonicated in methyl-tert-butyl ether for several minutes, and then collected by filtration yielding the product as a white solid (19.38 g, 79%). 1HNMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 3.45 (s, 3H), 7.47 (d, 1H), 7.89 (dd, 1H), 7.94 (d, 1H).
Figure imgf000056_0002
[000171] 7-Chloro-l-methyl-3,4-dihydro-lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepine-2,5-dione. In a 2 L
RBF equipped with mechanical stir, condenser and N2 inlet, glycine (38 g, 0.506 mol) was added to crude 6-chloro-l-methyl-lH-benzo[d][l ,3]oxazine-2,4-dione (107 g, 0.506 mol) followed by the addition of AcOH (500 mL). Reaction flask was heated in a 130 °C oil bath for 7 h. Solvent was evaporated under suction with heating (50-60 °C). To the thick syrupy crude product was added 1L of EtOAc followed by the slow addition of aqueous NaHC03 (saturated) to adjust the pH to ~ 7. Then 10 mL of 2 M NaOH was added to adjust the pH to -9-10. The mixture gave a solid along with organic and aqueous layers. Solid was filtered to give product containing some impurity. Solid was partitioned between 400 mL DCM and 200 mL NaHC03 and the slurry was stirred for 20 min, then filtered to remove the insoluble impurity. The DCM layer was separated and washed with 3% NaHC03 and then brine (200 mL). The DCM layer was dried (MgS04), filtered and concentrated to give 50 g of pure product. EtOAc layer was concentrated to give 67 g of solid product with some impurity. Aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc (2 x 400 mL). Combined organics were dried over Na2S04, filtered and concentrated to give an additional 6.7 g of crude product. Total of 123.4 g of product was obtained, 50 g of which was very clean. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ 3.2 (s, 3 H), 3.5 (m, 1 H), 3.8 (m, 1 H), 7.35 (d, 1 H), 7.6 (m, 2 H), 8.8 ( t, 1 H). Part II:
Figure imgf000057_0001
[000172] 6-Chloro-l-(4-methoxybenzyl)-lH-benzo[d] [l,3]oxazine-2,4-dione. In a 3 L, 3- neck RBF equipped with mechanical stir, thermocouple and N2 inlet, 90 g (0.455 mol) of 5- chloroisatoic anhydride was suspended in anhydrous THF (0.9 L). Under N2, 4- methoxybenzylchloride (75 g, 0.48 mol) was added followed by the addition of
tetrabutylammonium iodide (84 g, 0.23 mol). The reaction mixture was stirred for 5 min at room temperature and then 20 g (0.5 mol) of NaH was added portion- wise over 20 min (reaction temperature increased to 29 °C due to an exotherm and therefore reaction mixture was placed into water bath to keep the temperature below 30 °C). Reaction was stirred for 16 h (RT). Next day HPLC showed about 26% unreacted 5 -chloroisatoic anhydride. Additional NaH (1 g) was added and the reaction mixture was heated to 32 °C and stirred for another 5 h. NMR showed that all of the starting material had been consumed. Reaction was quenched by adding 10 g of glacial acetic acid slowly followed by stirring for 30 min. Reaction mixture was filtered through celite and filter cake was washed with THF. Filtrate was concentrated to give 280 g of crude product (yellow-brown solid), which was used with no further purification. 1H
NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 3.8 (s, 3 H), 5.25 (s, 2 H), 6.8 (d, 2 H), 7.2 (m, 3 H), 7.75 (d ,1 H), 7.9 (d, 1 H).
Figure imgf000057_0002
[000173] 7-Chloro-l-(4-methoxybenzyl)-3,4-dihydro-lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepine-2,5- dione. In a 2 L RBF equipped with mechanical stir, condenser and N2 inlet, glycine (34 g, 0.45 mol) was added to 6-chloro-l-(4-methoxybenzyl)-lH-benzo[d][l,3]oxazine-2,4-dione (280 g) followed by the addition of AcOH (500 mL). Reaction flask was heated in a 130°C oil bath for 8 h. Solvent was removed on the rotary evaporator at 50-60 °C. To the thick syrupy crude product was added heptane (1 L) and H20 (1 L) followed by the addition of NaHC03 to adjust the pH to ~8-9. The mixture gave a solid along with organic and aqueous layers. The organic and aqueous layers were decanted and the solid was slurried with 500 mL of 5% NaHC03 solution. NaHC03 layer was decant and sticky solid was suspended in 700 mL EtOAc and 300 mL of dichloromethane (DCM). The mixture was stirred for 20 min, filtered and the filter cake was washed with 1L of DCM. The filtrate was concentrated and residue was pass through 330 g silica gel plug using 25/75 to 75/25 EtOAC/heptane (total of 8 L). Clean fractions were combined to give 58 g of pure product. An additional 13 g of -70% pure product was obtained from less pure fractions. Yield was 47% over two steps. 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 3.45 (m, 1H), 3.6 (s, 3 H), 3.8 (m, 1H), 4.8 (d, 1H), 5.3 (d, 1H), 6.8 (d, 2 H), 7.1 (d, 2 H), 7.7- 7.5 (m, 3 H), 8.9 (t, 1 H).
Example 2
Representative General Procedure for Simultaneous Synthesis of the Benzodiazepine Core and Installation of C3 Functionality.
Figure imgf000058_0001
[000174] 7-Chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-3,4-dihydro-lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepine-2,5-dione.
2-Amino-3-(2-chlorophenyl)propanoic acid hydrochloride (3.0 g, 12.7 mmol) was suspended in acetonitrile (50 mL) and water (5 mL), triethylamine (3.57 mL, 25.4 mmol) was added which caused a precipitate to form and inefficient stirring. Water (10 mL) was added until all solids were dissolved. 5-Chloroisatoic anhydride (2.51 g, 12.7 mmol) was added in portions, waiting until each portion dissolved before adding the next. Successive portions required longer periods of time, up to 15 minutes for the last portions. After the last portion was added, the suspension was sonicated for several minutes then stirred at ambient temperature overnight. The clear solution was concentrated in vacuo then azeotroped twice with acetone. The residue was redissolved in acetic acid (30 mL) and heated to 130 °C for 6 hours. The mixture was concentrated in vacuo to an oil, diluted with ethyl acetate (150 mL), washed with water (3 x 50 mL) then brine, dried with sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated to a brown solid. This solid was resuspended in ethyl acetate (20 mL) and hexanes (10 mL) then slurried at ambient temperature for 30 minutes. Filtration provided 7-chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-3,4-dihydro-lH- benzo[e][l,4]diazepine-2,5-dione (2.4 g, 56%). 1H-NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 2.97 (m, 1H), 3.23 (m, 1H), 4.00 (m, 1H), 7.12 (d, 1H, J= 8.79 Hz), 7.27 (m, 2H), 7.40 (m, 2H), 7.58 (dd, 1H, J1 = 8.79 Hz, J2 = 2.64 Hz), 7.67 (d, 1H, J= 2.64 Hz), 8.73 (d, 1H, J= 6.15 Hz), 10.59 (s, 1H); ESI m/z 335.0, 337.0.
Example 3
Representative General Procedure for Installation of a Para-MethoxyBenzyl (PMB)
Protecting Group on the Nl-Amide Nitrogen Atom.
Figure imgf000059_0001
[000175] 7-Chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-l-(4-methoxybenzyl)-3,4-dihydro-lH- benzo [e] [ 1 ,4] diazepine-2,5-dione. 7-Chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-3 ,4-dihydro- 1 H- benzo[e][l,4]diazepine-2,5-dione (0.8 g, 2.39 mmol), powdered potassium carbonate (0.495 g, 3.58 mmol) and 4-methoxybenzyl chloride (0.39 mL, 2.86 mmol) were suspended in N,N- dimethylformamide (20 mL) and stirred at ambient temperature overnight. The solution was poured into water (100 mL) and ethyl acetate (150 mL). The layers were separated and the organic layer was washed with water (2 x 100 mL) then brine, and dried with sodium sulfate, decanted and concentrated in the presence of silica gel. The product was purified by column chromatography eluting with a gradient of 0-50% ethyl acetate in hexanes to yield 7-chloro-3- (2-chlorobenzyl)-l-(4-methoxybenzyl)-3,4-dihydro-lH-benzo[e][l,4]diazepine-2,5-dione (0.65 g, 60%). 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 3.06 (m, 1H), 3.30 (m, 2H), 3.66 (s, 3H), 4.13 (m,
1H), 4.82 (d, 1H), 5.34 (d, 1H), 6.76 (d, 2H, J= 8.79 Hz), 6.96 (d, 2H, J= 8.79 Hz), 7.21-29 (m, 2H), 7.36-45 (m, 2H), 7.54-7.61 (m, 3H), 8.97 (d, 1H, J= 5.86 Hz); ESI m/z 455.1.
Example 4
Representative General Procedure for Synthesis of (E)-5, 7-Dichloro-benzodiazepin-2(3H)- one.
Part I:
Figure imgf000060_0001
[000176] (^)-5,7-Dichloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-l-(4-methoxybenzyl)-lH- benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one. 7-Chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-l-(4-methoxybenzyl)-3,4- dihydro-lH-benzo[e][l,4]diazepine-2,5-dione (0.65 g, 1.43 mmol) was suspended in anhydrous toluene (10 mL) under a nitrogen atmosphere. N,N-Dimethylaniline (0.36 mL, 2.9 mmol) was added followed by phosphorus oxychloride (0.20 mL, 2.1 mmol) and the mixture was heated at 90 °C for 4 hours. After cooling to ambient temperature, the mixture was diluted with 40 mL of ethyl acetate :hexanes (1 :2), washed with ice water (10 mL), ice cold 1 M hydrogen chloride (2 x 10mL),and brine, then dried with sodium sulfate, decanted and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was redissolved in a small amount of ethyl acetate, then poured onto a silica plug. The product was eluted with 100 mL of ethyl acetate :hexanes (1 :2) to yield (E)-5,7-dichloro-3-(2- chlorobenzyl)-l-(4-methoxybenzyl)-lH-benzo[e][l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one (680 mg, 100%) which was used without further purification.
Part II:
Figure imgf000060_0002
[000177] (^)-5,7-Dichloro-l-methyl-lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one. In a 1 L 2 neck RBF equipped with mechanical stir, condenser and N2 inlet, 7-chloro-l-methyl-3,4-dihydro- lH-benzo[e][l,4]diazepine-2,5-dione (42.5 g, 0.189 mol) was suspended into 400 mL of toluene. To this was added N,N-dimethylanaline (45.5 g. 0.375 mol) followed by the addition of POCI3 (29 g, 0.189 mol) and the reaction mixture stirred for 3 min (RT). Reaction flask was placed in a 90 °C oil bath and the reaction mixture stirred/heated for 7 h and then at RT for 9 h. Reaction was auenched bv adding 500 mL of ice water and stirred for 15 min. Organic laver was separated and quickly washed with cold 0.5 M HC1 (300 mL), cold water (300 mL), and then cold saturated NaHC03 (300 mL). Organic layer was dried (MgSC^), filtered and concentrated on a rotary evaporator to give 40 g of yellow solid. Yield 87.5%. 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-de) δ 3.25 (s, 3 H), 3.8 -3.9 (s, 1 H, br), 4.3-4.4 (s, 1H, br), 7.4 (d, 1 H), 7.7-7.8 (m, 2H).
Part III:
Figure imgf000061_0001
[000178] (^)-5,7-Dichloro-l-(4-methoxybenzyl)-lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one. In a 1 L 3 neck RBF equipped with magnetic stir bar, condenser and N2 inlet, 7-chloro-l-(4- methoxybenzyl)-3,4-dihydro-lH-benzo[e][l,4]diazepine-2,5-dione (45 g, 0.136 mol) was suspended in 400 mL of toluene. To this was added N,N-dimethylanaline (33 g, 0.272 mol) followed by the addition of POCl3 (23 g) and the reaction stirred for 3 min (RT). Reaction flask was placed into a 90 °C oil bath and the reaction mixture was heated for 5 h and then cooled. The reaction was quenched by adding 450 mL of ice water and stirred for 15 min. The organic layer was separated and quickly washed with cold water (2 x 250 mL) and brine (300 mL). Then, the organic layer was dried over MgSC^, filtered and concentrated on a rotary evaporator to give 57 g of black crude product. Crude product was used for next step with no further purification. Yield 87.5%.
Example 5
Representative General Procedure for Installation of a C3-Substituent on (E)-5, 7-Dichloro- benzodiazepin-2(3H)-one.
Figure imgf000061_0002
[000179] (^)-3-(2-bromobenzyl)-5,7-dichloro-l-methyl-lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-2(3H)- one. (E)-5,7-Dichloro-l-methvl-lH-benzoreiri,41diazepin-2(3H)-one (400 mg, 1.65 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous tetrahydrofuran (5 mL) under a nitrogen atmosphere, cooled to -78 °C, then a 1 M solution of potassium fert-butoxide in tetrahydrofuran (1.7 mL, 1.7 mmol) was added dropwise. The reaction mixture was stirred for 10 minutes before a solution of the 2- bromobenzyl bromide (411 mg, 1.65 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (2 mL) was added dropwise. The mixture was stirred at -78 °C for 20 minutes then the cooling bath removed and the mixture was allowed to warm to ambient temperature and stirred at ambient temperature for 18 hours. Piperazine (283 mg, 3.29 mmol) was added to remove excess 2-bromobenzyl bromide and the mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 30 minutes, diluted with ethyl acetate, and washed with cold 1 M aqueous hydrogen chloride (2 x 40 mL). The organic layers were dried with sodium sulfate, decanted and concentrated in vacuo to approximately 20 mL of a red liquid. The product was purified on a short pad of silica gel eluting with 100 mL of ethyl acetate:hexanes (1 :2) to yield (E)-3-(2-bromobenzyl)-5,7-dichloro-l-methyl-lH- benzo[e][l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one (0.44 g, 65%). 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ 3.40 (s, 3H) 3.75 (m, 2H), 4.15 (m, 1H), 7.05-7.55 (m, 7H). Example 6
Representative Procedures for the Preparation of Benzyl Halides.
[000180] Benzyl halides can be prepared from the corresponding benzyl alcohol using known procedures, such as by treating a benzyl alcohol with thionyl chloride. A variety of benzyl alcohols are commercially available. In addition, a variety of benzyl alcohols can be prepared using the following methods: i) reduction of a commercially available carboxylic acid {e.g., reduction using lithium aluminum hydride); ii) conversion of a dibromo-benzyl alcohol to a dialkyl-benzyl alcohol using, for example, a dialkylzinc reagent in the presence of a palladium catalyst, such as PdCl2(dppf); iii) conversion of a dibromobenzyl acetate to a dialkyl benzyl acetate followed by hydrolysis; iv) formylation of the appropriate aromatic followed by reduction; or v) conversion of a reactive chlorobenzoate ester to the respective alkyl benzoate ester using, for example, a Grignard reagent in the presence of an iron catalyst, such as
Fe(acac)3, followed by reduction.
Part I: Representative Procedures for the Preparation of a Substituted Benzyl Alcohol from Dibromotoluene.
l,3-Dibromo-2-(bromomethyl)benzene. A mixture of 2,6-dibromotoluene (22.9 g, 92 mmol), N-bromosuccinimide (NBS) (15 g, 84 mmol), CC14 (250 mL) and benzoyl peroxide (0.03 eq) was stirred at 85°C (hot oil bath temperature) for 16 h, cooled to RT, filtered, washed with aq. NaHS03, dried (Na2S04), filtered, and evaporated to give 29.5 g (yield of 98%>) of title product as a white solid. This solid contained 10% unreacted starting material but was successfully used without further purification. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ 4.81 (s, 2 H), 7.01 (t, 1 H), 7.53 (d, 2 H).
2,6-Dibromobenzyl acetate. A mixture of l,3-dibromo-2-(bromomethyl)benzene (27.6 g, 84 mmol), NaOAc (35.5 g, 5 eq.) and dimethylformamide (DMF) (150 mL) was stirred at 100°C (hot oil bath temperature) for 1.75 h, allowed to cool, and then partitioned between heptane (500 mL) and water (200 mL). After removing the organic layer, the aqueous layer was extracted with heptane (200 mL). The combined organics were washed with H20 (2 x 300 mL), dried (Na2S04), filtered, and evaporated to give 24.57 g (yield of 95%>) of title product as a colorless oil. This oil contained 13% unreacted starting material but was successfully used without further purification. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ 2.10 (s, 3 H), 5.41 (s, 2 H), 7.08 (t,
1 H), 7.58 (d, 2 H).
2,6-Diethylbenzyl acetate. To a cooled (dry ice-acetone bath) mixture of 2,6-dibromo-benzyl acetate (5.05 g, 16.4 mmol) and PdCl2(dppf) (0.08 eq) in dry THF (50 mL) was added 1.1 M Et2Zn (60 mL, 66 mmol, 4 eq). The resulting mixture was allowed to warm to RT, stirred at 45°C (programmed block temperature, ~40 h), and added to a stirred mixture of dilute HCl and heptane/EtOAc. The organic layer was dried (Na2S04), filtered, and evaporated.
Chromatography (2%- 10% EtO Ac/heptane stepwise gradient) gave 2.12 g (yield of 63%) of the title product, along with 0.20 g of 2,6-diethylbenzyl alcohol. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ 1.21 (t, 6 H), 2.07 (s, 3 H), 2.70 (q, 4 H), 5.19 (s, 2 H), 7.09 (d, 2 H), 7.22 (dd, 1 H). The following compound was prepared by making appropriate substitutions to the above procedure: 2,6-Dimethylbenzyl acetate. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ 2.06 (s, 3 H), 2.39 (s, 6 H), 5.17 (s, 2 H), 7.02 (d, 2 H), 7.12 (dd, 1 H).
(2,6-Diethylphenyl)methanol. A mixture of 2,6-diethylbenzyl acetate (2.11 g, 10.2 mmol), MeOH (20 mL), H20 (6 mL), and NaOH (1.99 g, 50 mmol, 5 eq) was stirred at RT overnight. After concentrating, the mixture was extracted with heptane (50 mL). The organic layer was dried (Na2S04), filtered, and evaporated to give 1.90 g of title product. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ 1.23 (t, 1 H, OH), 1.24 (t, 6 H), 1.37 (br s, 1 H), 2.79 (q, 4 H), 4.75 (d, 2 H), 7.09 (d,
2 H), 7.21 (dd, 1 H). The following compound was prepared by making appropriate substitutions to the above procedure: (2,6-Dimethylphenyl)methanol. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ 1.25 (t, 1 H, OH), 2.41 (s, 6 H), 4.72 (d, 2 H), 7.0-7.15 (m, 3 H). Part 2: Representative Procedure for the Synthesis of an Alkyl-Substituted Benzoate Ester from a Halo-Substituted Benzoate Ester.
Methyl 2,4-diethylbenzoate. To a mixture of Fe(acac)3 (0.34 g, 0.96 mmol), methyl 2,4- dichlorobenzoate (4.0 g, 19.6 mmol), and N-methyl-2-pyrrolidinone (8 mL) in THF (100 mL) at -20 °C under nitrogen was added a tetrahydrofuran (THF) solution (1.0 M) of
ethylmagnesium bromide (40.0 mL, 40.0 mmol) over a period of ~5 min. The resulting mixture was stirred while gradually warming to ambient temperature. Stirring was continued for an additional 17 h. The reaction mixture was partitioned between water and
dichloromethane. The organic layer was separated, washed with brine, dried (MgS04), and pumped to dryness under reduced pressure. The brown residue was purified by column chromatography (Si02, 20% EtO Ac/heptane) to give 1.2 g of the desired product as a clear oil (yield of 32%), along with 1.1 g of methyl 4-ethylbenzoate. 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6) 51.15 (t, 3 H), 1.20 (t, 3 H), 2.66 (q, 2 H), 2.92 (q, 2 H), 3.82 (s, 3 H), 7.15 (d, 1 H), 7.23 (s, 1 H), 7.76 (d, 1 H). Part 3: Representative Procedure for the Synthesis of an Alkyl-Substituted Benzaldehyde from Alkyl-Substituted Benzene.
2,5-Diisopropylbenzaldehyde. In a 200 mL single neck RBF, equipped with magnetic stir bar, 1 ,4-diisopropylbenzene (4 g, 25 mmol) was dissolved into 50 mL of chloroform. To this solution was added SnCl4 (1 1.5 g , 5.2 mL, 4.5 mmol) via syringe over 5 min. The reaction mixture was stirred for 5 min and then Cl2CHOMe (2.8 g, 24 mmol) was added via syringe over 15 min. The reaction mixture was stirred for 20 h (RT) and reaction progress was followed by GC/MS. Reaction was quenched by adding 70 mL of water and stirring the mixture for 10 min. Organic layer was separated and washed with 3 N HC1 (2 x 50 mL). The organic layer was dried over MgS04, filtered and concentrated to give 4 g of crude product. This was subjected to column chromatography using 80 g of silica and from 100% heptane to 95 :5 Heptane:EtOAc as a mobile phase to give 2.4 g of product (yield of 56%). 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ 1.17 (d, 6 H), 1.25 (d, 6 H), 2.9 (septet, 1 H), 4.9 (septet, 1 H), 7.4 (m, 2 H), 7.65 (d , l H), 10.35 (s, 1 H).
The following compound was prepared based on the above procedure: 3,4- Diethylbenzaldehyde. 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6) 51.21 (m, 6 H), 2.72 (q, 4 H), 7.41 (d, 1 H), 7.71 (d, 1 H), 7.75 (s, 1 H). Part 4: Representative Procedure for the Synthesis of an Alkyl-Substituted Benzyl Alcohol from an Alkyl-Substituted Benzaldehyde.
(2,5-Diisopropylphenyl)methanol. In a 2-neck RBF equipped with magnetic stir bar and N2 inlet, 2,5-diisopropylbenzaldehyde (1.7 g, 9 mmol) was dissolved into 30 mL of EtOH and NaBH4 (0.37 g, 10 mmol) was added over 20 min (portion- wise). After 18 h stirring at RT, -95% of solvent was removed on a rotary evaporator and then 5 mL of 0.5 M HCl was added and product was extracted with 25 mL of EtOAc. Organic layer was washed with 15 mL of H20 and 15 mL of brine, dried over Na2S04, filtered and concentrated to dryness to obtain crude product. This material was subjected to chromatography using heptane: EtOAc as mobile phase to provide 1.1 g of pure product. Yield 65%. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ 1.2- 1.3 (d, 12 H), 2.8 (septet, 1 H), 3.2 (septet, 1 H), 5.7 (s, 2 H), 7.1-7.3 (m, 3 H).
Part 5: Representative Procedure for the Synthesis of an Alkyl-Substituted Benzyl Alcohol from a Dibromobenzyl Alcohol.
(3,5-Diethylphenyl)methanol. To a cooled (dry ice) mixture of 3, 5 -dibromobenzyl alcohol (1 g, 3.8 mmol) and PdCl2(dppf)[0.07 eq] in dry THF (10 mL) was added 1.1 M Et2Zn (15 mL, 16 mmol, 4.4 eq). The resulting mixture was allowed to warm to RT, stirred at 45°C (programmed block temperature, overnight). To bring the reaction to completion (disappearance of both starting material and monoalkylated product) additional 1.1 M Et2Zn (10 mL, 11 mmol, 2.9 eq) was added with continued stirring at 45°C (again overnight). After cooling, the reaction mixture was then added to a stirred mixture of dilute HCl and heptane/EtOAc (2: 1; -200 mL), and the organic layer was dried (Na2S04), filtered, and evaporated. Chromatography (10%> EtO Ac/heptane) gave 0.33 g (yield of 53%) of title product. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ 1.22 (t, 6 H), 1.65 (br s, 1 H), 2.61 (q, 4 H), 4.66 (s, 2 H), 6.95-7.05 (m, 3 H).
[000181] The following compounds can be prepared by making the appropriate substitutions to the above procedure.
(2,5-Diethylphenyl)methanol. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ 1.22 (t, 6 H), 1.50 (br s, 1 H), 2.61 (q, 2 H), 2.65 (q, 2 H), 4.70 (br s, 1 H), 7.0-7.2 (m, 3 H).
(3,4-Diethylphenyl)methanol. 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6) 51.14 (t, 3 H), 1.20 (t, 3 H), 2.62-2.70 (m, 4 H), 4.46 (d, 2 H), 5.03 (t, 1 H), 7.05-7.13 (m, 3 H).
Part 6: Representative Procedure for the Synthesis of an Alkyl-Substituted Benzyl Alcohol from an Alkyl-Substituted Benzyl Ester.
(2,4-Diethylphenyl)methanol. To a suspension of lithium aluminum hydride (0.47 g, 11.8 mmol) in anhydrous THF (20 mL) at room temperature under nitrogen was added a solution of methyl 2,4-diethylbenzoate (1.5 g, 7.8 mmol) in THF (15 mL) with stirring over a period of ~5 min. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 60 min and was then quenched by slow addition of ethyl acetate (until bubbling stopped). The mixture was partitioned between ethyl acetate and IN HC1 (aq). The aqueous layer was separated and extracted with ethyl acetate. Organic layers were combined, dried (MgS04), and evaporated to dryness to give 1.3 g of the desired alcohol as a clear oil (yield of 100%). 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) 51.13 (t, 3 H), 1.17 (t, 3 H), 2.58 (q, 2 H), 2.61 (q, 2 H), 4.43 (d, 2 H), 5.02 (t, 1 H), 7.05-7.11 (m, 3 H).
Part 7: Representative Procedure for the Synthesis of an Alkyl-Substituted Benzylhalide from an Alkyl-Substituted Benzyl Alcohol.
2-(Chloromethyl)-l,3-diethylbenzene. To a mixture of (2,6-diethylphenyl)methanol (1.83 g, 11.1 mmol), toluene (20 mL) and DMF (6 drops) was added SOCl2 (2.1 g, 1.6 eq). The resulting solution was stirred at RT (1 h). After evaporating to dryness, the residue was taken up in heptane (-50 mL) and washed with water (~5 mL), dried (Na2S04), filtered and evaporated to give 1.97 g (yield of 97%) of title product. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ 1.28 (t, 6 H), 2.79 (q, 2 H), 4.70 (s, 2 H), 7.09 (d, 2 H), 7.20 (m, 1 H).
[000182] The following compounds can be prepared by making the appropriate substitutions to the above procedure.
l-(Chloromethyl)-2,3-dimethylbenzene. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ 2.29 (s, 3 H), 2.31 (s, 3 H), 4.60 (s, 2 H), 7.0-7.2 (m, 3 H). l-(Iodomethyl)-2,4-dimethyl benzene. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ 2.23 (s, 6 H), 4.35 (s, 2 H), 6.9-7.05 (m, 2 H), 7.1 (d, 1 H).
1- (Chloromethyl)-3,4-dimethyl benzene. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ 2.20 (s, 6 H), 4.67 (s, 2 H), 7.1-7.2 (m, 3 H). 2-(Chloromethyl)-l,3-dimethylbenzene. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ 2.42 (s, 6 H), 4.64 (s,
2 H), 7.02 (d, 2 H), 7.12 (dd, 1 H).
2- (Iodomethyl)-l,4-dimethyl benzene. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ 2.22 (s, 3 H), 2.26 (s,
3 H), 4.15 (s, 2 H), 6.9-7 (m, 2 H), 7.16 (d, 1 H). l-(Chloromethyl)-2-ethylbenzene. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ 1.2-1.3 (t, 3 H), 2.75 (q, 2 H), 4.55 (s, 2 H), 7.1-7.35 (m, 4 H). l-(Chloromethyl)-2,4-diethylbenzene. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ 1.27 (m, 6 H), 2.69 (q, 2 H), 2.78 (q, 2 H), 4.66 (s, 2 H), 6.98-7.10 (m, 2 H), 7.26 (m, 1H, contains chloroform signal). l-(Chloromethyl)-3,4-diethylbenzene. 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 1.21 (t, 3 H), 1.25 (t, 3 H), 2.60 (q, 2 H), 2.64 (q, 2 H), 4.71 (s, 2 H), 7.15-7.40 (m, 3 H).
1- (Chloromethyl)-3,5-diethylbenzene. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ 1.23 (t, 6 H), 2.63 (q, 4 H), 4.54 (s, 2 H), 7.01 (d, 2 H), 7.05 (d, 1 H). 2-(Chloromethyl)-l,4-diethylbenzene. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ 1.22 (t, 3 H), 1.26 (t, 3 H), 2.61 (q, 2 H), 2.84 (q, 2 H), 4.60 (s, 2 H), 7.0-7.2 (m, 3 H).
2- (Bromomethyl)-l,4-diisopropylbenzene. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ 1.1-1.2 (d, 6 H), 1.2-1.3 (d, 6 H), 2.8 (septet, 1 H), 3.25 (septet, 1 H), 4.55 (s, 2 H), 7.1-7.3 (m, 3 H).
l-(Chloromethyl)-4-ethylbenzene and l-(Chloromethyl)-4-isopropylbenzene. Example 7
Representative Procedures for Palladium-Coupling Reaction to Install a Substituent at the C5-Position of the Benzodiazepine
Figure imgf000067_0001
[000183] 7-Chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)- 1 -(4-methoxybenzyl)-5-(3-methyl-2-oxo-2,3-dihydro- lH-benzo[d]imidazol-5-yl)-lH-benzo[e][l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one. 5,7-Dichloro-3-(2- chlorobenzyl)-l-(4-methoxybenzyl)-lH-benzo[e][l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one (0.416 g, 0.878 mmol) and l-methyl-6-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-l,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-lH-benzo[d]imidazol- 2(3H)-one (0.241 g, 0.878 mmol) were dissolved in 1,4-dioxane (5 mL) and LiCl (0.112 g, 2.63 mmol), and then CsOH (0.442 g, 2.63 mmol) was added followed by water (0.5 mL). The mixture was purged with nitrogen, then [tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)] palladium(O) (0.1 g,
0.088 mmol) was added and the flask was lowered into an 80 °C oil bath and heated at 100 °C for 5.5 h. After cooling to room temperature, the mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate and washed twice with water then once with brine. The organic layer was dried over MgS04, then filtered and concentrated onto silica gel. Chromatography eluting with 50-100% ethyl acetate in hexanes gave 7-chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-l-(4-methoxybenzyl)-5-(3-methyl-2-oxo-2,3- dihydro-lH-benzo[d]imidazol-5-yl)-lH-benzo[e][l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one (0.4 g, 0.68 mmol) as a yellow oil.
Example 8
Representative Procedures for Removal of a p-Methoxybenzyl Group.
Figure imgf000068_0001
[000184] 7-Chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-5-(3-methyl-2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-lH- benzo [d] imidazol-5-yl)- IH-benzo [e] [ 1 ,4] diazepin-2(3H)-one. 7-Chloro-3 -(2-chlorobenzyl)- l-(4-methoxybenzyl)-5-(3-methyl-2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-lH-benzo[d]imidazol-5-yl)-lH- benzo[e][l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one (0.4 g, 0.68 mmol) was dissolved in 10% anisole in 1,1- dichloroethene (DCE, 3 mL) under nitrogen and A1C13 (0.455 g, 3.42 mmol) was added in one portion. The resulting orange solution was heated to 85 °C for 1.5 h. The solution was allowed to cool. Ethyl acetate was added followed by ice water. This mixture was stirred for 30 min (turned from yellow to colorless) then partitioned and the organic layer was washed with water then brine. The organic layer was dried over MgSC^, then filtered to give a clear, very pale yellow solution. Silica gel was added and the solvent was removed under reduced pressure.
Chromatography on silica gel eluting with 5-50-100% ethyl acetate in hexanes gave 7-chloro-3- (2-chlorobenzyl)-5-(3-methyl-2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-lH-benzo[d]imidazol-5-yl)-lH- benzo[e][l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one as a white solid (59%> yield). Example 9
Representative Procedure for Preparation of (S)-7-Chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-5-(3-(3- hydroxypropyl)-2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-lH-benzofdJimidazol-5-yl)-lH-benzofeJfl,4Jdiazepin- 2(3H)-one (IV-4).
[000185] The title compound was prepared according to the procedures described below. Step 1: Preparation of 3-((5-Bromo-2-nitrophenyl)amino)propan-l-ol.
Figure imgf000069_0002
[000186] 4-Bromo-2-fluoro-l -nitrobenzene (5.38 g, 24.45 mmol) was dissolved in dry DMF (50 mL) under nitrogen and treated with 3-aminopropan-l-ol (5.51 g, 73.4 mmol) at RT. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 h. TLC indicated no starting material remaining. The mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate and washed with water several times, then with brine once. It was dried (MgSC^), then filtered and evaporated to give a yellow oil which was used without further purification.
Step 2: Preparation of 5-Bromo-N-(3-((tert-butyldimethylsilyl)oxy)propyl)-2-nitroaniline.
Figure imgf000069_0003
[000187] 3-((5-bromo-2-nitrophenyl)amino)propan-l-ol (6.73 g, 24.45 mmol) was dissolved in dry dichloromethane (50 mL), and diisopropylethyl amine (6.41 mL, 36.7 mmol) and tert- butyldimethylsilyl chloride (4.42 g, 29.3 mmol) were added. This mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 h. The organic layer was washed with water, then saturated aqueous ammonium chloride, and then brine. The organic layer was dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate, filtered and concentrated to give crude 5-bromo-N-(3-((tert- butyldimethylsilyl)oxy)propyl)-2-nitroaniline as an orange oil which was used without further purification.
Step 3: Preparation of 5-Bromo- V/-(3-((tert-butyldimethylsilyl)oxy)propyl)benzene-l,2- diamine. [000188] 5-Bromo-N-(3-((tert-butyldimethylsilyl)oxy)propyl)-2-nitroaniline from above was added to 2: 1 2-propanaol: water (75 mL) (precipitate formed). Iron powder was added (1.147 g, 20.6 mmol) and the mixture was heated to 80 °C for 1 h. It turned black. After allowing to cool, the mixture was filtered through celite, rinsing with ethyl acetate. The filtrate was washed with water, washed with then brine, dried (MgSC^), filtered, and concentrated to give crude 5- bromo-Ni-(3-((tert-butyldimethylsilyl)oxy)propyl)benzene-l,2-diamine.
Step 4: Preparation of 6-Bromo-l-(3-((tert-butyldimethylsilyl)oxy)propyl)-lH- benzo[d]imidazol-2(3H)-one.
Figure imgf000070_0001
[000189] 5-Bromo-M-(3-((tert-butyldimethylsilyl)oxy)propyl)benzene-l,2-diamine (1.8 g, 5.14 mmol) was dissolved in dry THF (50 mL) and Ι,Γ-carbonyl-diimidazole (0.92 g, 5.65 mmol) was added. The dark brown solution was stirred at room temperature under nitrogen overnight. The mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate and washed with water then brine and dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate. After filtration and concentration the crude product was chromatographed on silica gel eluting with 5-50% ethyl acetate in hexanes to give 6- bromo-l-(3-((tert-butyldimethylsilyl)oxy)propyl)-lH-benzo[d]imidazol-2(3H)-one as a purple oily foam (1.14 g, 2.96 mmol).
Step 5: Preparation ofl-(3-((Tert-butyldimethylsilyl)oxy)propyl)-6-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl- l,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-lH-benzofdJimidazol-2(3H)-one.
Figure imgf000070_0002
[000190] 6-Bromo-l-(3-((tert-butyldimethylsilyl)oxy)propyl)-lH-benzo[d]imidazol-2(3H)-one (1.14 g, 2.96 mmol) and bis(pinacolato)diboron (0.75 g, 2.96 mmol) were combined with potassium acetate (0.34 g, 3.6 mmol) in 1,4-dioxane (15 mL) and purged with nitrogen.
Pd(dppf)Cl2-CH2Cl2 (120 mg, 0.15 mmol) was added and the mixture was heated to 80 °C for 3 h. The mixture was allowed to cool and diluted with ethyl acetate. The organic layer was washed with water, then brine, and then dried using MgSC^. Chromatography eluting 50% ethyl acetate in hexanes gave l-(3-((tert-butyldimethylsilyl)oxy)propyl)-6-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl- l,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-lH-benzo[d]imidazol-2(3H)-one. Step 6: Preparation of (S)-5-(3-(3-((Tert-butyldimethylsilyl)oxy)propyl)-2-oxo-2,3-dihydro- lH-benzofdJimidazol-5-yl)-7-chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-l-(4-methoxybenzyl)-lH- benzo[e][l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one.
Figure imgf000071_0001
[000191] l-(3-((Tert-Butyldimethylsilyl)oxy)propyl)-6-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-l,3,2- dioxaborolan-2-yl)-lH-benzo[d]imidazol-2(3H)-one (0.46 g, 1.06 mmol) and (S)-5,7-dichloro- 3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-l-(4-methoxybenzyl)-lH-benzo[e][l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one (0.5 g, 1.06 mmol) were combined in toluene (4 mL) and saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate (2 mL) and purged with nitrogen. Tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (122 mg, 0.106 mmol) was added and the mixture was heated at 90 °C for 7.5 h. After cooling, the mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate and washed twice with water then once with brine then dried (MgSC^).
Chromatography, eluting with 10-50% ethyl acetate in hexanes gave the title compound as an orange brown solid (100 mg, 0.134 mmol).
Step 7: Preparation of (S)-7-Chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-5-(3-(3-hydroxypropyl)-2-oxo-2,3- dihydro-lH-benzofdJimidazol-5-yl)-l-(4-methoxybenzyl)-lH-benzofeJfl,4Jdiazepin-2(3H)- one.
Figure imgf000071_0002
[000192] (5)-5-(3-(3-((tert-Butyldimethylsilyl)oxy)propyl)-2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-lH- benzo[d]imidazol-5-yl)-7-chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-l-(4-methoxybenzyl)-lH- benzo[e][l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one (100 mg, 0.134 mmol) was dissolved in DCM (-10 mL) and treated with 0.5 mL trifluoroacetic acid. After 1.5 hr, the reaction was -30% complete by TLC. Another 0.5 mL trifluoroacetic acid was added. After another 1.5 hr, another 0.5 mL
trifluoroacetic acid was added. This mixture was allowed to stir at room temperature overnight. It was still mostly starting material by TLC. The solvent was evaporated and azeotroped 3x from DCM. 4 M HCl in 1,4-dioxane (3 mL) was added. This mixture was stirred at RT under nitrogen for 1 hr. TLC (quenched in Et3N-DCM) showed all starting material had converted. The solvent was evaporated to give the title compound as a yellow oil, which was used in the next step without further purification.
Step 8: Preparation of (S)-7-Chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-5-(3-(3-hydroxypropyl)-2-oxo-2,3- dihydro-lH-benzo[d]imidazol-5-yl)-lH-benzo[e][l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one.
Figure imgf000072_0001
[000193] (5)-7-Chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-5-(3-(3-hydroxypropyl)-2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-lH- benzo[d]imidazol-5-yl)-l-(4-methoxybenzyl)-lH-benzo[e][l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one was dissolved in dichloroethane (2 mL) and anisole (200 μί) was added followed by A1C13 (165 mg). This mixture was heated to 85 -90 °C for one hour. After cooling, the mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate and quenched with ice. 1M Citric acid was added and the layers separated. The organic layer was washed with brine, then dried (MgS04). After filtration, the solvent was evaporated onto silica gel. Chromatography eluting with 5% ethyl acetate in hexanes for 5 min then a gradient over 30 minutes up to 100% ethyl acetate gave the crude product as a yellow foam (70 mg). The product was re-columned twice with DCM - 10% MeOH in DCM to provide (S)-7-chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-5-(3-(3-hydroxypropyl)-2-oxo-2,3- dihydro-lH-benzo[d]imidazol-5-yl)-lH-benzo[e][l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one (20 mg) as a white solid that was 97% pure by HPLC : MP = 210 °C; Optical rotation: C = 1.0 (CHC13), [a]D = - 26°; MS (m/z): 509.6; 1H NMR (d6-DMSO) δ 11.5 (s, IH), 10.7 (s, IH), 7.6 (d, 1H)7.5 (d, IH), 7.4 (d, IH), 7.3-7.2 (m, 4H), 7.1 (s, IH), 6.95 (d, IH), 6.85 (d, IH), 4.3 (m, 2H), 3.8 (m, 2H), 3.7 (m, IH), 3.5-3.3 (m, 2H), 2.1-2.0 (m, 2H).
[000194] Based on the foregoing procedures, the following compounds were prepared. For example, (R)-7-chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-5-(3-(3-hydroxypropyl)-2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-lH- benzo[d]imidazol-5-yl)-lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one (IV-3) was prepared by using compound (R)-5 ,7-dichloro-3 -(2-chlorobenzyl)- 1 -(4-methoxybenzyl)- 1 H- benzo[e][l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one (0.5 g, 1.06 mmol) in place of compound (5)-5,7-dichloro-3- (2-chlorobenzyl)-l-(4-methoxybenzyl)-lH-benzo[e][l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one (0.5 g, 1.06 mmol) in Step 6: Optical rotation: C = 1.0 (CHC13), [<x]D = +26°; MS (m/z): 509; 1H NMR (d6- DMSO) δ 11.5 (s, 1H), 10.7 (s, 1H), 7.6 (d, 1H)7.5 (d, 1H), 7.4 (d, 1H), 7.3-7.2 (m, 4H), 7.15 (s, 1H), 6.9 (d, 1H), 6.8 (d, 1H), 4.5 (m, 2H), 3.8 (m, 2H), 3.7 (m, 1H), 3.5-3.3 (m, 2H), 1.7 (m, 2H).
7-Chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-5-(3-(3-hydroxypropyl)-2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-lH- benzo[d]imidazol-5-yl)-l-methyl-lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one (1-7) was prepared by using compound (E)-5,7-dichloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-l-methyl-lH-benzo[e][l,4]diazepin- 2(3H)-one in place of compound (5)-5,7-dichloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-l-(4-methoxybenzyl)-lH- benzo[e][l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one (0.5 g, 1.06 mmol) in Step 6: HRMS calc. = 523.1304 g/mol, HRMS obs. = 523.1302 g/mol; 1H NMR (d6-DMSO) δ 11.11 (s, 1H), 7.71 (m, 1H), 7.69 (m, 1H), 7.54 (m, 1H), 7.39 (m, 1H), 7.32-7.21 (m, 4H), 6.95 (m, 2H), 4.58 (t, 1H), 3.82 (m, 3H), 3.56 (m, 1H), 3.45 (m, 3H), 1.78 (m, 2H).
Example 10
Representative Procedures for Preparing 7-Chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-l-(2-hydroxyethyl)-5- (3-methyl-2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-lH-benzo[d]imidazol-5-yl)-lH-benzo[e][l,4]diazepin^
(1-8).
Figure imgf000073_0001
[000195] The title compound was prepared according to the following procedures.
Step 1: Preparation of 2-(7-Chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-2,5-dioxo-2,3,4,5-tetrahydi benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-l-yl)ethyl acetate
Figure imgf000073_0002
[000196] To 7-chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-3,4-dihydro-lH-benzo[e][l,4]diazepine-2,5-dione (0.5 g, 1.5 mmol) in N,N-dimethylformamide (10 mL), was added powdered potassium carbonate (0.31 g, 2.2 mmol) followed by 2-bromoethylacetate (0.17 mL, 1.6 mmol). The mixture was stirred at ambient temperature overnight. After 20 hours, more 2- bromoethylacetate (0.05 mL, 0.5 mmol) was added and stirring was continued at ambient temperature overnight. The reaction mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate (100 mL), washed with water (3 x 50 mL), washed with brine (50 mL), dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate, decanted, and concentrated to yield crude 2-(7-chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-2,5-dioxo-2,3,4,5- tetrahydro-lH-benzo[e][l,4]diazepin-l-yl)ethyl acetate, which was used directly in the next step without further purification. MS (m/z): 421.1 (M + H)+.
Step 2: Preparation of l-(2-((Tert-butyldimethylsilyl)oxy)ethyl)-7-chloro-3-(2- chlorobenzyl)-3, -dihydro-lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepine-2,5-dione.
Figure imgf000074_0001
[000197] To 2-(7-chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-2,5-dioxo-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH- benzo[e][l,4]diazepin-l-yl)ethyl acetate (0.62 g, 1.47 mmol) suspended in tetrahydrofuran (10 mL) was added 2M aqueous sodium hydroxide (2.2 mL, 4.4 mmol). Methanol (2 mL) was added, which caused the solution to become homogeneous. The solution was stirred at ambient temperature for 2 hours, then acidified with 1M hydrochloric acid, partitioned between ethyl acetate and brine, separated, dried with sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The resulting solid was dissolved in N,N-dimethylformamide (10 mL), and imidazole (0.14 g, 2 mmol) was added followed by fert-butyldimethylsilyl chloride (0.24 g, 1.6 mmol). This mixture was stirred at ambient temperature overnight, then diluted with ethyl acetate, washed with 10% citric acid, water, and brine, dried with sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in the presence of silica gel. The product was purified by column chromatography eluting with a gradient of 0-50% ethyl acetate in hexanes to yield l-(2-((tert-butyldimethylsilyl)oxy)ethyl)-7- chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-3,4-dihydro-lH-benzo[e][l,4]diazepine-2,5-dione.
Step 3: Preparation of 5,7-Dichloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-l-(2-chloroethyl)-lH- benzo [e] [ 1 ,4] di
Figure imgf000074_0002
[000198] To l-(2-((tert-butyldimethylsilyl)oxy)ethyl)-7-chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-3,4- dihydro-lH-benzo[e][l,4]diazepine-2,5-dione (0.33 g, 0.67 mmol) in anhydrous toluene (10 mL) under a nitrogen atmosphere was added N,N-dimethylaniline (0.25 mL, 2 mmol) and phosphorus oxychloride (0.13 mL, 1.3 mmol). This mixture was then heated to 90 °C overnight. The solution was cooled, diluted with ethyl acetate, washed with water, 1M hydrochloric acid, then brine, and dried with sodium sulfate. Activated charcoal was added and the mixture was slurried, then filtered through a silica gel plug eluting with 50% ethyl acetate in hexanes to yield 5,7-dichloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-l-(2-chloroethyl)-lH- benzo[e][l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one as an oil which was used directly in the next step. MS (m/z): 417.0 (M + H)+.
Step 4: Preparation of 7-Chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-l-(2-hydroxyethyl)-5-(3-methyl-2- oxo-2,3-dih dro- lH-benzo [d] imidazol-5-yl)- lH-benzo [e] [ 1 ,4] diazepin-2(3H)-one.
Figure imgf000075_0001
[000199] 5,7-Dichloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-l-(2-chloroethyl)-lH-benzo[e][l,4]diazepin-2(3H)- one (0.31 g, 0.75 mmol) and l-methyl-6-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-l,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-lH- benzo[d]imidazol-2(3H)-one (0.2 g, 0.75 mmol) were dissolved in anhydrous 1,4-dioxane (12 mL) while bubbling nitrogen into the solution. Lithium chloride (95 mg, 2.2 mmol) and
[Tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)]palladium(0) (0.09 g, 0.074 mmol) were added followed by cesium hydroxide monohydrate (0.38 g, 2.2 mmol) and water (1 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at 100 °C under a nitrogen atmosphere for 20 hours. The mixture was cooled, diluted with ethyl acetate, washed with water, then brine, dried with sodium sulfate, decanted and concentrated in vacuo. The product was purified by column chromatography eluting with a gradient of 80-100% ethyl acetate in hexanes, followed by 0-10% methanol in ethyl acetate. It was further purified by column chromatography eluting with a gradient of 0-12% methanol in dichloromethane to yield 7-chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-l-(2-hydroxyethyl)-5-(3-methyl-2-oxo- 2,3-dihydro-lH-benzo[d]imidazol-5-yl)-lH-benzo[e][l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one. 1HNMR (DMSO-d6, 400 MHz) δ 11.09 (s, 1H), 7.81 (d, 1H), 7.68 (dd, 1H), 7.49 (d, 1H), 7.38 (d, 1H), 7.31-7.19 (m, 4H), 6.98 (m, 2H), 4.72 (t, 1H), 4.08 (m, 1H), 3.8 (m, 2H), 3.6-3.3 (m, 4H), 3.26 is. 3HV HRMS ΓΜ+Η1+ predicted: 509.1147. found: 509.1133. Example 11
Representative Procedures for Preparing 7-Chloro-3-(4-chlorobenzyl)-5-(3-methyl-2-oxo- 2,3-dihydro-lH-benzo[d]imidazol-5-yl)-lH-benzo[e][l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one (1-13).
Figure imgf000076_0001
[000200] The title compound was prepared according to the following procedures.
Step 1: Preparation of Palladium Coupling Compound N-Methyl-2-nitro-5-(4,4,5,5- tetramethyl-l,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)aniline.
[000201] The palladium coupling compound N-methyl-2-nitro-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-l,3,2- dioxaborolan-2-yl)aniline was prepared according to the following procedures.
Part A: Preparation of 5-Bromo-N-methyl-2-nitroaniline.
Figure imgf000076_0002
[000202] 4-Bromo-2-fluoronitrobenzene (Aldrich, 1 eqvt), methylamine (2 eqvt), and hunig's base (3 eqvt) in DMF (1 Molar in substrate) were placed in a sealed vial and heated to 85 °C overnight. The crude mixture was diluted with water, and the product collected by filtration. Purification by chromatography (gradient: 92:8 hexanes:ethyl acetate to 68:32 hexanes:ethyl acetate) provided the title compound. 1HNMR (DMSO-d6, 400 MHz) δ 8.22 (bd, J = 4.4 Hz, 1H), 7.95 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 1H), 7.14 (d, J = 2 Hz, 1H), 6.80 (dd, J = 9.2, 2.4 Hz, 1H), 2.92 (d, J = 4.8 Hz).
Part B: Preparation of N-Methyl-2-nitro-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-l,3,2- dioxaborolan-2-yl)aniline.
Figure imgf000076_0003
[000203] 5-Bromo-N-methyl-2-nitroaniline (1 eqvt), bis(pinacolatodiboron) (1.2 eqvt), and potassium acetate (2 eqvt) were combined in dioxane (0.15 M) and degassed 3x replacing the air with nitrogen gas. Pd(dppf) (0.1 eqvt) was added and degassing was done once more. The reaction mixture was heated to 80 °C for three hours. The mixture was then cooled to room temperature and partitioned between water and ethyl acetate. The organic fraction was washed with brine, then concentrated onto silica gel and purified by chromatography to provide the title compound. MS (m/z): 317.2 (M + K)+. 1HNMR (DMSO-d6, 400 MHz) δ 8.1 1 (bd, J = 4.8 Hz, 1H), 8.01 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 1H), 7.16 (d, J = 0.8 Hz, 1H), 6.87 (dd, J = 8.4, 0.8 Hz, 1H), 2.93 (d, J = 4.8, 3H), 1.28 (s, 12 H). Step 2: Palladium Coupling Reaction to Provide 7-Chloro-3-(4-chlorobenzyl)-l-(4- methoxybenzyl)-5-(3-(methylamino)-4-nitrophenyl)-lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one.
Figure imgf000077_0001
[000204] Dichlorobenzodiazepine compound 5, 7-dichloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-l -methyl- 1 H- benzo[e][l ,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one was reacted with N-methyl-2-nitro-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl- l ,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)aniline under Suzuki coupling conditions based on those described in Example 7 to provide the title compound characterized by MS (m/z): 589.3 (M + 1)+ and 1HNMR (DMSO-d6, 400 MHz) δ 8.16 (bd, J = 5.2 Hz, 1H), 8.04 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 1H), 7.75 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 1H), 7.64 (dd, J = 8.8, 2.4 Hz, 1H), 7.35 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H), 7.29 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H), 7.14 (d, J = 2.4 Hz, 1 H), 6.81 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H), 6.64 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 2H), 6.60 (s, 1H), 6.32 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 1H), 5.48 (d, J = 15.2 Hz, 1H), 4.75 (d, J = 15.6 Hz, 1H), 3.90 (m, 1H), 3.60 (s, 3H), 3.42 - 3.35 (m, 2H), 2.75 (d, J = 4.8 Hz, 3H). Step 3: Reduction of Nitro-Aniline Substituted Benzodiazepine to Form Diamine Compound 5-(4-Amino-3-(methylamino)phenyl)-7-chloro-3-(4-chlorobenzyl)-l-(4- methoxybenzyl)-lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one.
Figure imgf000078_0001
[000205] Nitro-aniline compound 7-chloro-3-(4-chlorobenzyl)-l-(4-methoxybenzyl)-5 -(3 - (methylamino)-4-nitrophenyl)-lH-benzo[e][l ,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one was reduced using a mixture of Fe and ammonium chloride to provide the title compound having a MS (m/z) of 559.3 (M + 1)+.
Step 4: Reaction of Amino-aniline Substituted Benzodiazepine with Triphosgene to Form Benzimidazolone Compound 7-Chloro-3-(4-chlorobenzyl)-l-(4-methoxybenzyl)-5-(3- methyl-2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-lH-benzo[d]imidazol-5-yl)-lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-2(3H)- one.
Figure imgf000078_0002
[000206] Amino-aniline compound 5-(4-Amino-3-(methylamino)phenyl)-7-chloro-3-(4- chlorobenzyl)-l-(4-methoxybenzyl)-lH-benzo[e][l ,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one was treated with triphosgene to provide the title compound having a MS (m/z) of 585.3 (M + 1)+. Step 5: Removal of PMB Protecting Group to Provide Compound 7-Chloro-3-(4- chlorobenzyl)-5-(3-methyl-2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-lH-benzo[d]imidazol-5-yl)-lH- benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one (1-13).
Figure imgf000079_0001
[000207] PMB -protected benzodiazepine was treated with A1C13 according to the general procedures described in Example 8 to provide the title compound characterized by MS (m/z): 465.2 (M + 1)+ and 1HNMR (DMSO-d6, 400 MHz) δ 1 1.08 (bs, 1H), 10.62 (bs, 1H), 7.60 (dd, J = 8.8, 2.4 Hz, 1H), 7.36 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 2H), 7.31 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H), 7.23 (s, 1H), 7.20 (t, J = 2.4 Hz, 1H), 7.10 (d, J = 1.6 Hz, 1H), 6.96 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 1H), 6.90 (dd, J = 8.0, 1.6 Hz, 1H), 3.66 (t, J = 8 H, 1H), 3.35 - 3.31 (m, 2H), 3.25 (s, 3H).
Example 12
Exemplary Procedures for Synthesis of a Benzodiazepinone Containing a C7-Fluoro Group, such as Compound 3-(2-Chlorobenzyl)-7-fluoro-5-(2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-lH-benzofdJimidazol- 5-yl)-lH-benzofeJfl,4Jdiazepin-2(3H)-one (II-l).
Figure imgf000079_0002
[000208] The title compound was prepared according to the procedures described below.
Step 1: Preparation of 6-Fluoro-lH-benzo[d] [l,3]oxazine-2,4-dione.
Figure imgf000079_0003
[000209] To a solution of 5-fluoroanthranilic acid (10.0 g, 65.5 mmol) in THF ( 143 mL) was added solid triphosgene (6.70 g, 22.6 mmol, 0.35 equiv). The reaction mixture was stirred at rt overnight and the resulting suspension was filtered and dried to afford 9.23 g (79%) of 5- fluoroisatoic anhydride: 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 7.14 (M, 1 H), 7.60 (M, 2 H), 11.72 (s, 1 H).
[000210] In a separate preparation, 2-amino-5-fluorobenzoic acid (15 g, 97 mmol) was dissolved in tetrahydrofuran (250 mL) and triphosgene (10.04 g, 33.8 mmol) was added portion-wise. A thick white precipitate formed with a small exotherm. The slurry gradually became easier to stir and was left stirring at room temperature for 16 h. The mixture was filtered to provide a white solid which was rinsed with diethyl ether then dried at 50 °C in a vacuum over to give 6-fluoro-lH-benzo[d][l,3]oxazine-2,4-dione (14.1 g, 78 mmol). The 6- fluoro-lH-benzo[d][l,3]oxazine-2,4-dione may be converted to a 7-fluoro-l-(4- methoxybenzyl)-3,4-dihydro-lH-benzo[e][l,4]diazepine-2,5-dione using the procedures described in Example 1.
Step 2: Preparation of 3-(2-Chlorobenzyl)-7-fluoro-3,4-dihydro-lH- benzo [e] [ 1 ,4] diazepine-2,5-dione.
Figure imgf000080_0001
[000211] A suspension of 5-flouroisatoic anhydride (2.15 g, 11.9 mmol), amino acid hydrochloride (2.80 g, 11.9 mmol, 1.0 equiv) and triethylamine (3.34 mL, 23.7 mmol, 2.0 equiv) in CH3CN/ H20 (1/1, 23.8 mL) was stirred at rt overnight. The reaction mixture was concentrated, redissolved in HO Ac (11.9 mL) and heated in 120 °C oil bath overnight. The reaction mixture was poured into water (200 mL) and the solid collected by filtration. A slurry was formed by the addition of CH3CN (15 mL) and the resulting solid was collected by filtration and dried to afford 2.39 g (63%) of the product. 1H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 2.99 (dd, J= 14.9, 7.8 Hz, 1 H), 3.29 (d, J = 14.7 Hz, 1 H), 4.00 (dt, J= 8.8, 5.7 Hz, 1 H), 7.15 (m, 1 H), 7.28 (m, 2 H), 7.42 (m, 4 H), 8.75 (d, J= 6.1, 1 H), 10.52 (s, 1 H). Step 3: Preparation of 3-(2-Chlorobenzyl)-7-fluoro-l-(4-methoxybenzyl)-3,4-dihydro-lH- benzo[e] [l,4]diazepine-2,5-dione.
Figure imgf000081_0001
[000212] ara-methoxybenzylchloride (PMBCI) (1.07 mL, 7.87 mmol, 1.05 equiv) was added to a suspension of benzodiazepine-dione (2.39 g, 7.50 mmol) and potassium carbonate (1.19 g, 8.62 mmol, 1.15 equiv) in DMF (15.0 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at rt overnight. The reaction was quenched with water (100 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (2 x 50 mL). The organic extract was washed with brine (25 mL), dried (Na2S04), filtered and concentrated. A solid developed upon dissolution in EtOH. The solid was collected by filtration, rinsed with EtOH and dried to afford 2.35 g (71%) of the title compound. 1H NMR (500 MHz, CDC13) δ 3.30 (dd, J= 14.6, 8.7 Hz, 1 H), 3.51 (dd, J = 14.7, 5.9 Hz, 1 H), 3.76 (s, 3 H), 4.20 (dt, J= 8.6, 5.9 Hz, 1 H), 4.92 (d, J= 15.2 Hz, 1 H), 5.18 (d, J= 15.2 Hz, 1 H), 6.54 (m, 1 H), 6.80 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 2 H), 7.04 (d, J= 8.8 Hz, 2 H), 7.25 (m, 3 H), 7.36 (m, 2 H), 7.47 (m, 1H).
Step 4: Preparation of Di-tert-butyl 5-(3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-7-fluoro-l-(4-methoxybenzyl)- 2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-5-yl)-2-oxo-lH-benzo[d]imidazole-l,3(2H)- dicarboxylate.
Figure imgf000081_0002
[000213] A solution of benzodiazepine-dione (0.500 g, 1.14 mmol), POCl3 (0.133 mL, 1.42 mmol, 1.25 equiv) and dimethylaniline (0.289 mL, 2.28 mmol, 2.0 equiv) was heated to 90 °C overnight. The reaction mixture was cooled, diluted with water (50 mL) and toluene (50 mL). The phases were separated and the aqueous phase was extracted with toluene (50 mL). The organic extracts were washed with brine (50 mL), combined, treated with Na2S04 (10 g) and DARCO-G60 (1 g) for 10 min. The dark suspension was filtered through celite and the filter cake was rinsed with toluene (50 mL). The filtrate was concentrated to afford cloroimidate intermediate. 1H NMR (500 MHz, CDC13) δ 3.54 (dd, J= 13.9, 6.9 Hz, 1 H), 3.77 (s, 3 H), 3.80 (dd, J = 13.9, 6.9 Hz, 1 H), 3.93 (t, J= 6.9 Hz, 1 H), 4.80 (d, J= 15.2 Hz, 1 H), 5.30 (d, J = 15.2 Hz, 1 H), 6.77 (d, J = 8.5 Hz, 2 H), 6.94 (d, J = 8.5 Hz, 2 H), 7.23 (m, 5 H), 7.38 (m, 1 H), 7.55 (m, 1 H).
[000214] A solution of the chloroimidate intermediate and the boronic acid pinacol ester (0.550 g, 1.19 mmol, 1.05 equiv) in toluene (2.5 mL) was diluted with z'-PrOH (2.5 mL) and saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution (0.63 mL) under N2 purge. Palladium catalyst (66 mg, 0.057 mmol, 0.05 equiv) was added and the mixture was heated at 60 °C for 6 h. The reaction mixture was diluted with water (10 mL) and toluene (20 mL). The phases were separated and the aqueous phase was extracted with toluene (20 mL). The combined extracts were concentrated and the residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (20 g Si02, 0-50% EtO Ac/hex) to afford 735 mg of the title compound as a mixture on mono- and bis-Boc protected material, which was used without further purification.
Step 5: Preparation of 3-(2-Chlorobenzyl)-7-fluoro-5-(2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-lH- benzo[d]imidazol-5-yl)-lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one (II-l).
Figure imgf000082_0001
[000215] A1C13 (779 mg, 5.84 mmol, 6.0 equiv) was added to a solution of PMB-protected benzodiazepine (735 mg, 0.973 mmol) in anisole (9.7 mL). The resulting orange suspension was stirred at 40 °C for 14 h. The reaction mixture was cooled to rt and poured into ice water/EtOAc and stirred vigorously for 10 min. The organic phase was separated, washed with brine, dried (Na2S04), filtered and concentrated. The residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (20 g Si02, 0-9% MeOH/CH2Cl2). The product was then slurried in CH3CN, filtered and dried to afford 125 mg (30%) of the title compound. 1H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO- d6) δ 3.48 (d, J= 6.6 Hz, 2 H), 3.76 (t, j = 6.8 Hz, 1 H), 6.93 (m, 2 H), 7.05 (s, 1 H), 7.11 (m, 1 H), 7.27 (m, 3 H), 7.38 (m, 1 H), 7.47 (M, 2 H), 10.63, (s, 1H), 10.69 (s 1 H), 10.84 (s, 1H); HPLC purity = 98.3%,TR = 6.44 min (Waters C-18 column, 4.6 x 150 mm, 3.5 micron, 1.0 mL/min, 2 min 25% MeCN in H20 (0.1% TFA), 10 min gradient of 25%-95% MeCN in H20 (0.1% TFA), then 95% MeCN in H20 (0.1% TFA) for 5 min); HRMS (ES ) calc'd for
C23Hi6ClFN402 +Hi 435.1024, found 435.1032.
Example 13
Representative General Procedures for Alkylation of Nitrogen atom on a Benzimidazolone Substituent to Provide Compound 7-Chloro-5-(3-ethyl-2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-lH- benzo[d]imidazol-5-yl)-l-methyl-3-(naphthalen-2-ylmethyl)-lH-benzo[e][l,4]diazepin-2 one (1-1).
Figure imgf000083_0001
[000216] 7-Chloro-l-methyl-3-(naphthalen-2-ylmethyl)-5-(2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-lH- benzo[d]imidazol-5-yl)-lH-benzo[e][l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one (0.13 g, 0.27 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous DMF (4 mL) and cooled to 0 °C under nitrogen. Sodium hydride (60%> in oil, 10 mg, 0.27 mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred for 5 minutes. Ethyl bromide (20 μί, 0.27 mmol) was added. The mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature. After 15 minutes additional sodium hydride was added (10 mg). After another 1 hr, more sodium hydride (10 mg) and ethyl bromide (20 uL) were added. Stirring was continued for an additional 5 hours. Then, water was added, followed by the addition of ethyl acetate to form a mixture that partitioned. The aqueous layer from the mixture was extracted twice with ethyl acetate, and the combined extracts were washed with brine and then dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate. The drying agent was removed and the solvents evaporated.
Chromatography on silica gel gave four components, which were assigned by NMR
spectroscopy and mass spectroscopy.
[000217] One component was identified as 7-chloro-5-(3-ethyl-2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-lH- benzo[d]imidazol-5-yl)-l-methyl-3-(naphthalen-2-ylmethyl)-lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin- 2(3H)-one (1-1). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) δ 1.3 (t, 3H), 1.6 (s, 3H), 3.4 (s, 3H), 3.6-3.82 (m, 3H), 3.9 (q, 2H), 7.0-7.1 (m, 3H), 7.2-7.4 (m, 2H), 7.4-7.6 (m, 4H), 7.6-7.75 (m, 1H), 7.75- 7.9 (m, 4H), 9.2 (s, 1H). ESI m/z 509 (M+l+).
[000218] Another component was identified as 7-chloro-5-(l-ethyl-2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-lH- benzo[d]imidazol-5-yl)-l-methyl-3-(naphthalen-2-ylmethyl)-lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin- 2(3H)-one. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) δ 1.3 (t, 3H), 1.6 (s, 3H), 3.4 (s, 3H), 3.6-3.82 (m, 3H), 3.9 (q, 2H), 6.98 (m, 1H), 7.2-7.4 (m, 4H), 7.4-7.6 (m, 4H), 7.75-7.9 (m, 4H), 8.6 (s, 1H); ESI m/z 509 (M+l+).
Example 14
Representative Procedures for Synthesis of 6-Chloro-8-methoxy-lH-benzofdJfl,3Joxazine- 2,4-dione.
Figure imgf000084_0001
[000219] The title compound was prepared according to the following procedures.
Step 1: Preparation of 8-Methox -lH-benzo[d] [l,3]oxazine-2,4-dione.
Figure imgf000084_0002
[000220] To 2-amino-3-methoxybenzoic acid (5 g, 30 mmol) in anhydrous tetrahydrofuran (50 mL) was added triphosgene (3.55 g, 12 mmol). This mixture was heated to reflux under a nitrogen atmosphere for 3 hours. It was cooled to ambient temperature, and diethyl ether (50 mL) was added. The mixture was filtered to yield 8-methoxy-lH-benzo[d][l,3]oxazine-2,4- dione (5.25 g, 91%) as a solid.
Step 2: Preparation of Methyl 2-amino-3-methoxybenzoate.
Figure imgf000084_0003
[000221] To 8-methoxy-lH-benzo[d][l,3]oxazine-2,4-dione (0.8 g, 4.1 mmol) in anhydrous methanol (25 mL), was added sodium hydroxide (0.24 g, 4.1 mmol) and the mixture was heated to reflux for 2 hours. The solution was cooled, diluted with ethyl acetate, washed with water, saturated sodium bicarbonate, then brine, and dried with sodium sulfate. It was filtered and concentrated to yield methyl 2-amino-3-methoxybenzoate (750 mg, 100%).
Step 3: Preparation of Methyl 2-amino-5-chloro-3-methoxybenzoate. [000222] To methyl 2-amino-3-methoxybenzoate (750 mg, 4.1 mmol) in anhydrous N,N- dimethylformamide (15 mL) was added N-chlorosuccinimide (580 mg, 4.35 mmol) and this mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 2 hours. The temperature was increased to 60 °C for 4 hours. The deep red solution was cooled, diluted with ethyl acetate, washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate, water, then brine, dried with sodium sulfate, decanted and concentrated to yield crude methyl 2-amino-5-chloro-3-methoxybenzoate (0.85 g, 95%). MS (m/z): 216.1 (M + H)+.
Step 4: Preparation of 2-Amino-5-chloro-3-methox benzoic acid.
Figure imgf000085_0001
[000223] Methyl 2-amino-5-chloro-3-methoxybenzoate (770 mg, 3.57 mmol) was suspended in tetrahydrofuran (20 mL), 2M sodium hydroxide (5 mL) was added and the mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 20 hours. The solution was concentrated in vacuo, then partitioned between ethyl acetate and 1M hydrochloric acid. The organic layer was washed with water, then brine, dried with sodium sulfate, decanted and concentrated in vacuo to yield 2-amino-5-chloro-3-methoxybenzoic acid.
Step 5: Preparation of 6-Chloro-8-methox -lH-benzo d l 3 oxazine-2,4-dione.
Figure imgf000085_0002
[000224] To 2-amino-5-chloro-3-methoxybenzoic acid (0.72 g, 3.57 mmol) in anhydrous tetrahydrofuran (15 mL) was added triphosgene (0.53 g, 1.8 mmol). The mixture was heated to refluxed under a nitrogen atmosphere for 2.5 hours. The resulting solution was cooled to ambient temperature, diethyl ether (10 mL) was added, which caused a solid to precipitate. The solid was collected by filtration and washed with more diethyl ether to yield 6-chloro-8- methoxy-lH-benzo[d][l,3]oxazine-2,4-dione. MS (m/z): 226.3, 228.3 (M + H)+.
[000225] The following compound was prepared based on the above procedures and substituting compound 2-amino-3-fluorobenzoic acid for compound 2-amino-3- methoxybenzoic acid in Step 1 : 6-Chloro-8-fluoro-lH-benzo[d] [l,3]oxazine-2,4-dione. Example 15
Representative General Procedure for Conversion of a Methyl Ether to a Phenol.
Figure imgf000086_0001
[000226] To 7-chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-9-methoxy-5-(3-methyl-2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-lH- benzo[d]imidazol-5-yl)-lH-benzo[e][l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one (25 mg, 0.05 mmol) under a nitrogen atmosphere was added 1M boron tribromide solution in dichloromethane (3 mL). This mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 1 hour, then quenched with water (30 mL). Ethyl acetate (30 mL) was added and the mixture was slurried overnight. The layers were separated and the organic layer was dried with sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The product was purified by column chromatography eluting with a gradient of 0-20% methanol in dichloromethane to yield 7-chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-9-hydroxy-5-(3-methyl-2- oxo-2,3-dihydro-lH-benzo[d]imidazol-5-yl)-lH-benzo[e][l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one. HRMS [M+H]+ predicted: 481.0834, found: 481.0828.
Example 16
Representative Procedures for the Synthesis of 7-Chloro-3-(2-chloro-4-fluorobenzyl)-5-(4- hydroxy-3-methylphenyl)-lH-benzofeJfl,4Jdiazepin-2(3H)-one (III-4).
Figure imgf000086_0002
[000227] The title compound was prepared according to the following procedures. Step 1: Representative Procedures for Alkylation at the C3-Position of the Benzodiazepine
Figure imgf000087_0001
[000228] 5,7-Dichloro-l-(4-methoxybenzyl)-lH-benzo[e][l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one (0.85 g, 3.82 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous tetrahydrofuran (15 mL) and cooled to -78 °C under nitrogen. Potassium tert-butoxide (0.48 g, 3.82 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous
tetrahydrofuran (4 mL) and added to the benzodiazepine via syringe. After 2 minutes, a solution of the 2-chloro-4-fluorobenzyl bromide (1.27 g, 3.64 mmol) in anhydrous
tetrahydrofuran (3 mL) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at -78 °C for 2 then allowed to warm to room temperature over 1 h. The reaction was quenched with water and the layers partitioned. The organic layer was evaporated onto silica gel and chromatographed eluting with 10-35% ethyl acetate in hexanes to obtain 5,7-dichloro-3-(2-chloro-4- fluorobenzyl)-l-(4-methoxybenzyl)-lH-benzo[e][l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one (0.6 g, 1.22 mmol).
Step 2: Representative Procedures for Installing a Protected Phenol at the C5-Position of a Benzodiazepine.
Figure imgf000087_0002
[000229] 5 ,7-Dichloro-3 -(2-chloro-4-fluorobenzyl)- 1 -(4-methoxybenzyl)- 1 H- benzo[e][l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one (0.3 g, 0.61 mmol) was combined with lithium chloride (0.078 g, 1.83 mmol), cesium hydroxide hydrate (0.31 g, 1.83 mmol) and 2-(4-methoxy-3- methylphenyl)-4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-l,3,2-dioxaborolane (0.151 g, 0.61 mmol) in 1,4-dioxane (3 mL) and water (0.3 mL) and the mixture was purged with nitrogen.
[Tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)]palladium(0) (0.07 g, 0.061 mmol) was added and the mixture was heated in a CEM Discover microwave reactor at 160 °C for 20 minutes. The mixture was allowed to cool and diluted with ethyl acetate then washed with water then brine. The organic layer was concentrated onto silica gel and chromatographed on a silica gel column eluting with 10-35% ethyl acetate in hexanes to give 7-chloro-3-(2-chloro-4-fluorobenzyl)-5-(4-methoxy-3- methylphenyl)- 1 -(4-methoxybenzyl)- 1 H-benzo [e] [ 1 ,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one .
Step 3: Representative Procedures for O-Demethylation of a Protected Phenol at the C5- Position of the Benzodiazepine.
Figure imgf000088_0001
[000230] 7-Chloro-3-(2-chloro-4-fiuorobenzyl)-5-(4-methoxy-3 -methylphenyl)- 1H- benzo[e][l ,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one (0.158 g, 0.345 mmol) was dissolved in dichloromethane
(DCM, 2 mL) and BBr3 in DCM (1 M, 1.73 mL, 1.73 mmol) was added dropwise. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 4 h. then quenched with methanol and diluted with ethyl acetate. The organic solution was washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate (aq) then brine. It was concentrated onto silica gel then chromatographed on silica gel eluting with 35-40-45% ethyl acetate in hexanes to give 7-chloro-3-(2-chloro-4-fluorobenzyl)-5-(4-hydroxy-3- methylphenyl)-lH-benzo[e][l ,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one as a yellow oil which precipitated as a pale yellow solid from chloroform (158 mg, 0.345 mmol).
[000231] Based on the foregoing procedures, the following compounds were also prepared:
7-Chloro-3-(2-chloro-5-fluorobenzyl)-5-(4-methoxy-3-methylphenyl)-lH- benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one. MS (m/z): 457.1 (M + 1)+;
7-Chloro-3-(2-chloro-5-fluorobenzyl)-5-(4-methoxy-3-methylphenyl)-l-(4- methoxybenzyl)-lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one. MS (m/z): 577.3 (M + 1)+;
5,7-Dichloro-3-(2-chloro-5-fluorobenzyl)-l-(4-methoxybenzyl)-lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin- 2(3H)-one. MS (m/z): 529.2 (M + K)+; 7-Chloro-3-(2-chloro-5-fluorobenzyl)-5-(4-hydroxy-3-methylphenyl)-lH- benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one (III-2). MS (m/z): 443.1 (M + 1)+. 1HNMR (DMSO-d6, 400 MHz) δ 10.72 (s, 1H), 9.88 (s, 1H), 7.60 (dd, J = 8.8, 1.6 Hz, 1H), 7.42 (dd, J = 8.8, 5.2 Hz, 1H), 7.34 (dd, J = 10, 3.2 Hz, 1H), 7.23 - 7.15 (m, 3H), 7.10 (dt, J = 8.4, 2.8 Hz, 1H), 6.94 (dd, J = 8.4, 2 Hz, IH), 6.74 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, IH), 3.71 (dd, J = 8.4, 4.8 Hz, IH), 3.53 - 3.39 (m, 2H), 2.08 (s, 3H);
7-Chloro-3-(4-chlorobenzyl)-5-(4-methoxy-3-methylphenyl)-l-(4-methoxybenzyl)-lH- benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one. MS (m/z): 559.3 (M + 1)+; 7-Chloro-3-(4-chlorobenzyl)-5-(4-methoxy-3-methylphenyl)-lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin- 2(3H)-one. MS (m/z): 439.0 (M + 1)+;
7-Chloro-3-(4-chlorobenzyl)-5-(4-hydroxy-3-methylphenyl)-lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin- 2(3H)-one (III-3). MS (m/z): 425.2 (M + 1)+. 1HNMR (DMSO-d6, 400 MHz) δ 10.71 (s, IH), 9.94 (s, IH), 7.66 (dd, J = 8.8 Hz, IH), 7.42 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H), 7.38 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H), 7.29 - 7.22 (m, 3H), 7.08 (dd, J = 8, 2 Hz, IH), 6.85 (d, J = 8 Hz, IH), 3.69 (t, J = 8 Hz, IH), 3.39 - 3.29 (m, 2H), 2.18 (s, 3H);
7-Chloro-3-(2-chloro-4-fluorobenzyl)-5-(4-hydroxy-3-methylphenyl)-lH- benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one (III-4). 1H NMR (400 MHz, D6-DMSO) δ 2.09 (s, 3H), 3.30-3.47 (m, 2H), 3.68 (dd, IH), 6.75 (d, IH), 6.97 (dd, IH), 7.12-7.23 (m, 4H), 7.35 (dd, IH), 7.51 (dd, IH), 7.59 (dd, IH), 9.85 (br s, IH), 10.68 (s, IH); ESI m/z 443.1 (M+);
7-Chloro-5-(4-hydroxy-3-methylphenyl)-3-(2-(trifluoromethyl)benzyl)-lH- benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one (III-5). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) δ 2.22 (s, 3H), 3.71- 3.75 (m, 2H), 3.79-3.83 (m, IH), 6.1 (br s, IH), 6.68 (d, IH), 7.03 (d, IH), 7.1 1 (d, IH), 7.24- 7.27 (m, 2H), 7.32 (t, IH), 7.42 (d, IH), 7.51 (t, IH), 7.60 (d, IH), 7.78 (d, IH), 9.23 (br s, IH); ESI m/z 459.2 (M+l+);
7-Chloro-5-(4-hydroxy-3-methylphenyl)-3-(4-(trifluoromethyl)benzyl)-lH- benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one (III-6). 1H NMR (400 MHz, D6-DMSO) δ 2.09 (s, 3H), two protons buried under HDO peak, 3.74 (t, IH), 6.78 (d, IH), 7.01 (d, IH), 7.15 (d, IH), 7.22 (dd, 2H), 7.42 (d, 2H), 7.60 (dd, IH), 7.82 (d, 2H), 9.90 (br s, IH), 10.69 (s, IH); and 2-(5-(7-Chloro-3-(3,4-diethylbenzyl)-2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-5-yl)-2- hydroxyphenyl)acetamide (III-l). Example 17
Representative Procedure for Preparation of (R)-7-Chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-5-(4-hydroxy- 3-methylphenyl)-lH-benzofeJfl,4Jdiazepin-2(3H)-one (IV-6).
Figure imgf000090_0001
[000232] The title compound was prepared according to the procedures shown in the scheme below. Compound 5-chloroisatoic anhydride (A) was reacted with ( ?)-2-chlorophenylalanine to provide benzodiazepine-dione B based on procedures described in, for instance, Example 2. Reaction of benzodiazepine-dione B with para -methoxybenzyl chloride in the presence of base, according to procedures described in, for instance, Example 3, provided PMB-protected benzodiazepine-dione C. Conversion of benzodiazepine-dione C to imidoyl chloride D was accomplished using phosphorous oxychloride, based on procedures described in, for instance, Example 4. The substituted phenyl group was installed using Suzuki coupling, based on procedures described in, for instance, Example 7, to provide benzodiazepine E. The PMB protecting group was removed by reacting benzodiazepine E with A1C13, based on procedures described in, for instance, Example 8, to provide benzodiazepine F. Methyl phenyl ether F was converted to phenol G using boron tribromide, based on procedures described in, for instance, Example 16.
Figure imgf000090_0002
Figure imgf000090_0003
Figure imgf000091_0001
G
Physical Characterization Data for Compound (R)-7-Chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-5-(4- hydroxy-3-methylphenyl)-lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one (IV-6): MS (m/z): 425.2 (M + 1)+. 1HNMR (DMSO-d6, 400 MHz) δ 10.68 (s, 1H), 9.84 (s, 1H), 7.58 (dd, J = 8.8, 2.4 Hz, 1H), 7.46 (dd, J = 7.2, 1.6 Hz, 1H), 7.36 (dd, J = 8, 1.6 Hz, 1H), 7.27 (dt, J = 7.6, 1.6 Hz, 1H), 7.23 (s, 1H), 7.21 - 7.19 (m, 2H), 7.13 (d, J = 1.6 Hz, 1H), 6.97 (dd, J = 8.4, 2.4 Hz, 1H), 6.74 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 1H), 3.68 (t, J = 6.8 Hz, 1H), 3.44 (d, J = 7.2 Hz, 2H), 2.08 (s, 3H).
Physical Characterization Data for Synthetic Intermediate Compounds: (R)-7-Chloro-3-(2- chlorobenzyl)-5-(4-methoxy-3-methylphenyl)-l-(4-methoxybenzyl)-lH- benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one. MS (m/z): 559.3 (M + 1)+; and (R)-7-Chloro-3-(2- chlorobenzyl)-5-(4-methoxy-3-methylphenyl)-lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one. MS
(m/z): 439.2 (M + 1)+.
[000233] The following compound was prepared by making appropriate substitutions to the above synthetic procedure:
(S)-7-Chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-5-(4-hydroxy-3-methylphenyl)-lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin- 2(3H)-one (IV-5): 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) δ 2.22 (s, 3H), 3.62 (dd, 2H), 3.73 (m, 1H), 3.85 (m, 1H), 5.31 (br s, 1H), 6.67 (d, 1H), 7.04 (dd, 1H), 7.06 (d, 1H), 7.18 (m, 1H), 7.23-7.27 (m, 3H), 7.31 (dd, 1H), 7.44 (dd, 1H), 7.60 (dd, 1H), 8.78 (s, 1H). Example 18
Representative Procedure for Preparation of (R)-7-Chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-5-(3-methyl-2- oxo-2,3-dihydro-lH-benzofdJimidazol-5-yl)-lH-benzofeJfl,4Jdiazepin-2(3H)-one (IV-1).
Figure imgf000092_0001
[000234] The title compound was prepared according to the procedures shown in the scheme below. Compound 5-chloroisatoic anhydride (A) was reacted with ( ?)-2-chlorophenylalanine to provide benzodiazepine-dione B based on procedures described in, for instance, Example 2. Reaction of benzodiazepine-dione B with para-methoxybenzyl chloride in the presence of base, according to procedures described in, for instance, Example 3, provided PMB-protected benzodiazepine-dione C. Conversion of benzodiazepine-dione C to imidoyl chloride D was accomplished using phosphorous oxychloride, based on procedures described in, for instance, Example 4. The benzimidazolone substituent was installed using Suzuki coupling, based on procedures described in, for instance, Example 7, to provide benzodiazepine E. Removal of the PMB protecting group was accomplished by reacting benzodiazepine E with A1C13, based on procedures described in, for instance, Example 8, to provide benzodiazepine F.
Figure imgf000092_0002
Figure imgf000092_0003
Figure imgf000093_0001
Physical Characterization Data for Compound (R)-7-Chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-5-(3- methyl-2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-lH-benzo[d]imidazol-5-yl)-lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one (IV-1): Optical rotation data: C = 1.0 (CHC13), [<x]D = +73°; MS (m/z): 465.1 ; 1H NMR (d6- DMSO) δ 1 1.08 (s, 1H), 10.75 (s, 1H), 7.63 (m, 1H), 7.53 (m, 1H), 7.40 (m, 1H), 7.33-7.22 (m, 4H), 7.12 (m, 1H), 6.96 (m, 1H), 6.89 (m, 1H) 3.76 (m, 1H), 3.56-3.42 (m, 2H), 3.26 (s, 1H).
[000235] The following compounds were prepared based on the above general procedures: For example, compound (S)-7-chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-5-(3-methyl-2-oxo-2,3-dihydro- lH-benzo[d]imidazol-5-yl)-lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one (IV-2) was prepared by using (iS)-2-chlorophenylalanine in place of ( ?)-2-chlorophenylalanine: Optical rotation data: C = 1.0 (CHCls), [<x]D = -62°; MS (m/z): 465.1 , 467.1 ; 1H NMR (d6-DMSO) δ 1 1.08 (s, 1H), 10.75 (s, 1H), 7.63 (m, 1H), 7.53 (m, 1H), 7.40 (m, 1H), 7.33-7.23 (m, 4H), 7.13 (m, 1H), 6.96 (m, 1H), 6.89 (m, 1H) 3.76 (m, 1H), 3.56-3.42 (m, 2H), 3.26 (s, 1H);
7-Chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-5-(3-methyl-2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-lH-benzo[d]imidazol-5-yl)- lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one (1-2): HRMS calc. = 465.0885 g/mol, HRMS obs. = 465.0882 g/mol; 1H NMR (d6-DMSO) δ 1 1.07 (br s, 1H), 10.75 (br s, 1H), 7.64-7.51 (m, 3H), 7.41-7.21 (m, 4H), 7.1-6.9 (m, 3H), 3.75 (m, 1H), 3.47 (m, 2H);
2-(6-(7-Chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-5-yl)-2- oxo-2,3-dihydro-lH-benzo[d]imidazol-l-yl)acetic acid (1-3): HRMS calc. = 509.0783 g/mol, HRMS obs. 509.0771 g/mol; 1H NMR (d6-DMSO) δ 1 1.22 (s, 1H), 10.76 (s, 1H), 7.63 (dd, 1H), 7.53 (m, 1H), 7.39 (m, 1H) 7.32-7.16 (m, 5H), 7.0 (m, 1H), 6.92 (m, 1H), 4.54 (m, 2H), 3.73 (m, 1H), 3.45 (m, 2H);
2-(6-(7-Chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-5-yl)-2- oxo-2,3-dihydro-lH-benzo[d]imidazol-l-yl)-N-methylacetamide (1-4): HRMS calc. = 522.1 100 g/mol, HRMS obs. = 522.1 100 g/mol;
7-Chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-5-(3-(3-hydroxypropyl)-2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-lH- benzo[d]imidazol-5-yl)-lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one (1-5): HRMS calc. = 509.1 147 g/mol, HRMS obs. 509.1139 g/mol; 1H NMR (d6-DMSO) δ 11.09 (br s, IH), 10.76 (br s, IH), 7.65-7.54 (m, 6H), 6.96 (m, IH), 6.85 (m, IH), 4.56 (m, IH), 3.8 (br m, 3H), 3.45 (br m, 3H), 1.77 (br m, 2H);
7-Chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-5-(3-(2-hydroxyethyl)-2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-lH- benzo[d]imidazol-5-yl)-lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one (1-6): HRMS calc. = 495.0991 g/mol, HRMS obs. = 495.0986 g/mol;
7-Chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-9-methoxy-5-(3-methyl-2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-lH- benzo[d]imidazol-5-yl)-lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one (1-9): HRMS calc. = 495.0991 g/mol, HRMS obs. = 495.0994 g/mol; 1H NMR (d6-DMSO) δ 11.08 (s, IH), 9.93 (s, IH), 7.53 (dd, IH), 7.40 (d, IH), 7.38-7.22 (m, 3H), 7.14 (d, IH), 6.94 (m, 2H), 6.80 (d, IH), 3.91 (s, 3H), 3.75 (m, IH), 3.5 (m, 2H), 3.26 (s, 3H);
7-Chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-9-hydroxy-5-(3-methyl-2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-lH- benzo[d]imidazol-5-yl)-lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one (1-10): HRMS calc. =
481.0834 g/mol, HRMS obs. = 481.0828 g/mol;
7-Chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-l-methyl-5-(3-methyl-2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-lH- benzo[d]imidazol-5-yl)-lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one (I-ll): MS (m/z): 479.1; 1H
NMR (d6-DMSO) δ 9.79 (s, IH), 7.75 - 7.40 (m, 4H), 7.40 - 6.95 (m, 6H), 3.90 (t, IH), 3.72 (d, 2H), 3.45 (s, 3H), 3.42 (s, 3H); and
7-Chloro-3-(2-chlorobenzyl)-9-fluoro-5-(3-methyl-2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-lH- benzo[d]imidazol-5-yl)-lH-benzo[e] [l,4]diazepin-2(3H)-one (1-12): HRMS calc. =
483.0791 g/mol, HRMS obs. = 493.0801 g/mol; 1H NMR (d6-DMSO) δ 11.06 (s, IH), 10.63 (s, IH), 7.72 (m, IH), 7.47 (m, IH), 7.36 (m, IH), 7.28-7.20 (m, 2H), 7.1 (m, 2H), 6.92 (m, 2H) 3.84 (m, IH), 3.5-3.35 (m, 2H), 3.27 (s, IH).
Example 19
[000236] Representative compounds were tested for cytotoxicity in Ramos cells and inhibitory activity against ATPase. The Ramos cell death assay and ATPase inhibition assay were conducted as described in K. M. Johnson et al. Chemistry & Biology 2005, 12, 485-496.
Results from the Ramos cell death assay and the ATPase inhibition assay are provided in Table 7. TABLE 7
Figure imgf000095_0001
INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE
[000237] The entire disclosure of each of the patent documents and scientific articles referred to herein is incorporated by reference for all purposes. EQUIVALENTS
[000238] The invention may be embodied in other specific forms without departing from the spirit or essential characteristics thereof. The foregoing embodiments are therefore to be considered in all respects illustrative rather than limiting the invention described herein. Scope of the invention is thus indicated by the appended claims rather than by the foregoing description, and all changes that come within the meaning and range of equivalency of the claims are intended to be embraced therein.

Claims

We claim:
1. A compound represented by Formula I:
Figure imgf000097_0001
I
including a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
X1 is CI or F;
X2 is hydrogen, halogen, hydroxyl, methoxy, ethoxy, methyl, or
R1 is hydrogen, C1-C3 alkyl, hydroxyethyl, or hydroxypropyl;
Figure imgf000097_0002
R3 and R4 are independently hydrogen, C1-C5 alkyl, or Z; provided that both R3 and R4 not hydrogen, and provided that both R3 and R4 are not Z;
R5 represents independently for each occurrence halogen, trifluoromethyl, or C1-C5 alkyl;
R6 represents independently for each occurrence hydrogen or C1-C5 alkyl;
Z is Ci-C4alkylene-C02R6, Ci-C4alkylene-C(0)N(R6)2, or Ci-C4alkyl substituted with
-OR6;
n is 1 or 2; and
the stereochemical configuration at a stereocenter in a compound represented by Formula I is R, S, or a mixture thereof.
2. The compound of claim 1, wherein X1 is CI.
3. The compound of claim 1 or 2, wherein X2 is hydrogen or halogen.
4. The compound of any one of claims 1-3, wherein R1 is hydrogen.
5. The compound of any one of claims 1-3, wherein R1 is C1-C3 alkyl.
6. The compound of any one of claims 1-5, wherein R 2 is "TGT(R5)"
7. The compound of any one of claims 1-6, wherein R5 is halogen.
8. The compound of any one of claims 1-6, wherein R5 is chloro.
9. The compound of any one of claims 1-8, wherein n is 1.
10. The compound of any one of claims 1-5, wherein R2 is
Figure imgf000098_0001
11. The compound of any one of claims 1-10, wherein R3 and R4 are independently hydrogen or C1-C5 alkyl; provided that both R3 and R4 are not hydrogen.
12. The compound of any one of claims 1-10, wherein R3 is hydrogen; and R4 is methyl, ethyl or propyl.
13. The compound of any one of claims 1-10, wherein R3 is methyl, ethyl or propyl; and R4 is hydrogen.
14. The compound of claim 1, wherein the compound is represented by Formula IA:
Figure imgf000098_0002
IA
including a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
R1 is hydrogen, methyl, or ethyl;
Figure imgf000098_0003
R3 and R4 are independently hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, or Z; provided that both R3 and R4 are not hydrogen, and provided that both R3 and R4 are not Z;
R5 represents independently for each occurrence CI or F;
Z is hydroxyethyl, hydroxylpropyl, or hydroxybutyl; n is 1 or 2; and
the stereochemical configuration at a stereocenter in a compound represented by Formula IA is R, S, or a mixture thereof.
15. The compound of claim 14, wherein R2 is
Figure imgf000099_0001
16. The compound of claim 14 or 15, wherein R3 and R4 are independently hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, or propyl; provided that both R3 and R4 are not hydrogen.
17. The compound of any one of claims 14-16, wherein R5 is CI, and n is 1.
18. A compound represented by Formula II:
Figure imgf000099_0002
II
including a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
X is hydrogen, halogen, hydroxyl, methoxy, ethoxy, methyl, or
R1 is hydrogen, C1-C3 alkyl, hydroxyethyl, or hydroxypropyl;
Figure imgf000099_0003
R3 represents independently for each occurrence halogen, trifluoromethyl, or C1-C5 alkyl;
n is 1 or 2; and
the stereochemical configuration at a stereocenter in a compound represented by Formula II is R, S, or a mixture thereof.
19. The compound of claim 18, wherein X is hydrogen.
20. The compound of claim 18 or 19, wherein R1 is hydrogen or C1-C3 alkyl.
21. The compound of any one of claims 18-20, wherein R2 is
Figure imgf000100_0001
22. The compound of any one of claims 18-21, wherein R3 is halogen.
23. The compound of any one of claims 18-21, wherein R3 is CI.
24. The compound of any one of claims 18-23, wherein n is 1.
25. The compound of any one of claims 18-20, wherein
Figure imgf000100_0002
26. A compound represented by Formula III:
Figure imgf000100_0003
III
including a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
X1 is CI, F, or CF3;
X2 is hydrogen, halogen, hydroxyl, methoxy, ethoxy, methyl, or ethyl;
R1 is hydrogen, C1-C3 alkyl, hydroxyethyl, or hydroxypropyl;
R2 represents independently for each occurrence halogen, trifluoromethyl, or Ci-C3 alkyl;
R3 represents independently for each occurrence Ci-C3 alkyl, Ci-C4alkylene-C02R5, Ci-C4alkylene-C(0)N(R5)2;
R4 is hydrogen or halogen;
R5 represents independently for each occurrence hydrogen or C1-C5 alkyl;
m and n are independently 1 or 2; and
the stereochemical configuration at a stereocenter in a compound represented by Formula III is R, S, or a mixture thereof.
27. The compound of claim 26, wherein X1 is CI.
28. The compound of claim 26 or 27, wherein X2 is hydrogen.
29. The compound of any one of claims 26-28, wherein R1 is hydrogen.
30. The compound of any one of claims 26-28, wherein R1 is C1-C3 alkyl.
31. The compound of any one of claims 26-30, wherein R2 is trifluoromethyl.
32. The compound of any one of claims 26-30, wherein R2 is halogen.
33. The compound of any one of claims 26-30, wherein R2 is CI or F.
34. The compound of any one of claims 26-33, wherein R3 is C1-C3 alkyl.
35. The compound of any one of claims 26-33, wherein R3 is methyl.
36. The compound of any one of claims 26-35, wherein n is 1.
37. The compound of any one of claims 26-35, wherein n is 2
38. The compound of any one of claims 26-37, wherein m is 1.
39. A compound listed in Tables 1-4, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
40. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of any one of claims 1-39 and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
41. A method of treating a disorder selected from the group consisting of rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, graft- versus-host disease, Crohn's disease, inflammatory bowel disease, multiple sclerosis, psoriasis, systemic lupus erythematosus, Celiac Sprue, idiopathic
thrombocytopenic thrombotic purpura, myasthenia gravis, Sjogren's syndrome, scleroderma, ulcerative colitis, asthma, epidermal hyperplasia, cardiovascular disease, myeloma, lymphoma, cancer, and bacterial infection, comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of any one of claims 1-39 to a patient in need thereof to ameliorate a symptom of the disorder.
42. The method of claim 41, wherein the disorder is Crohn's disease, inflammatory bowel disease, multiple sclerosis, graft-versus-host disease, systemic lupus erythematosus, rheumatoid arthritis, or psoriasis.
43. The method of claim 41, wherein the disorder is rheumatoid arthritis, graft-versus-host disease, or inflammatory bowel disease.
44. The method of any one of claims 41-43, wherein the patient is a human.
45. A method of inhibiting a FiFo-ATPase, comprising exposing a FiFo-ATPase to a compound of any one of claims 1-39 to inhibit said FiFo-ATPase.
46. The method of claim 45, wherein the FiFo-ATPase is mitochondrial FiFo-ATPase.
PCT/US2010/049282 2009-09-18 2010-09-17 Benzodiazepinone compounds and methods of treatment using same WO2011035124A1 (en)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2012529929A JP2013505258A (en) 2009-09-18 2010-09-17 Benzodiazepinone compounds and therapeutic methods using the same
EP10817891A EP2470020A4 (en) 2009-09-18 2010-09-17 Benzodiazepinone compounds and methods of treatment using same
US13/395,566 US8673897B2 (en) 2009-09-18 2010-09-17 Benzodiazepinone compounds and methods of treatment using same

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US24379209P 2009-09-18 2009-09-18
US61/243,792 2009-09-18

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2011035124A1 true WO2011035124A1 (en) 2011-03-24

Family

ID=43759022

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2010/049282 WO2011035124A1 (en) 2009-09-18 2010-09-17 Benzodiazepinone compounds and methods of treatment using same

Country Status (4)

Country Link
US (1) US8673897B2 (en)
EP (1) EP2470020A4 (en)
JP (1) JP2013505258A (en)
WO (1) WO2011035124A1 (en)

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP2603079A1 (en) * 2010-08-12 2013-06-19 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Positive allosteric modulators of mglur2
WO2019043217A1 (en) 2017-09-04 2019-03-07 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Dihydrobenzimidazolones
WO2020181232A1 (en) 2019-03-06 2020-09-10 C4 Therapeutics, Inc. Heterocyclic compounds for medical treatment

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US10669242B2 (en) * 2016-06-10 2020-06-02 Venenum Biodesign, LLC Clostridium difficile toxin inhibitors

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5391566A (en) * 1993-07-20 1995-02-21 Merck & Co., Inc. Benzimidazolinones substituted with phenoxyphenylacetic acid derivatives
US7125866B1 (en) * 1999-04-30 2006-10-24 Regents Of The University Of Michigan Therapeutic applications of pro-apoptotic benzodiazepines
US7144880B2 (en) * 1999-04-30 2006-12-05 Regents Of The University Of Michigan Compositions relating to novel compounds and targets thereof

Family Cites Families (94)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3374264A (en) 1962-10-04 1968-03-19 Hoffmann La Roche N-haloacetyl-anthranilic acids and esters
US3261828A (en) 1962-10-04 1966-07-19 Hoffmann La Roche 3h-1,4-benzodiazepine-2,5(1h,4h)-dione compounds
US3384635A (en) 1966-09-28 1968-05-21 Sterling Drug Inc 1, 4-benzodiazepine derivatives
US3415814A (en) 1966-09-28 1968-12-10 Sterling Drug Inc 4-(cyclopropylmethyl)-3h-1,4-benzodiazepine-2,5(1h,4h)-dione
AT280290B (en) 1967-11-24 1970-04-10 Boehringer Sohn Ingelheim Process for the preparation of new 1-phenyl-4-alkyl-3H-1,4-benzodiazepine-2,5- [1H, 4H] -diones
USRE30293E (en) 1969-03-18 1980-06-03 Knoll A.G. Process for preparing 1,5-benzodiazepine-2-ones
US4108852A (en) 1969-03-18 1978-08-22 Knoll Ag. Process for preparing 1,5-benzodiazepine-2-ones
CH559729A5 (en) 1970-10-23 1975-03-14 Hoechst Ag
GB1324469A (en) 1970-10-28 1973-07-25 Knoll Ag Derivatives of benzodiazepines
ZA7469B (en) 1973-01-16 1974-11-27 J Voorhees Compositions and treatment of proliferative skin diseases with-c-amp analogs
IE38931B1 (en) 1973-03-09 1978-07-05 Lipha Triazolobenzodiazepines
US4076823A (en) 1977-08-18 1978-02-28 E. R. Squibb & Sons, Inc. Triazolo-2,4-benzodiazepines
JPS59112984A (en) 1982-12-21 1984-06-29 Shionogi & Co Ltd 1,4-benzodiazepine derivative
US4495101A (en) 1983-04-28 1985-01-22 American Home Products Corporation Antiinflammatory 5H-tetrazolo (5,1-c)(1,4)benzodiazepine derivatives
US4551480A (en) 1983-06-21 1985-11-05 Stiefel Laboratories, Inc. Compositions for the treatment of psoriasis
US4894366A (en) 1984-12-03 1990-01-16 Fujisawa Pharmaceutical Company, Ltd. Tricyclo compounds, a process for their production and a pharmaceutical composition containing the same
US4820834A (en) 1984-06-26 1989-04-11 Merck & Co., Inc. Benzodiazepine analogs
US5004741A (en) 1984-06-26 1991-04-02 Merck & Co., Inc. Methods of antagonizing CCK or gastrin with benzodiazepine analogs
DE3435974A1 (en) 1984-10-01 1986-04-10 Boehringer Ingelheim KG, 6507 Ingelheim PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING DIAZEPINE WITH PAF-ANTAGONISTIC EFFECT
FR2591596B1 (en) 1985-12-13 1988-09-09 Roussel Uclaf NOVEL 4H-TRIAZOLO (4,3-A) (1,4) BENZODIAZEPINES, THEIR PREPARATION PROCESS, THEIR APPLICATION AS MEDICAMENTS AND THE COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING THEM
GB8608080D0 (en) 1986-04-02 1986-05-08 Fujisawa Pharmaceutical Co Solid dispersion composition
US4946778A (en) 1987-09-21 1990-08-07 Genex Corporation Single polypeptide chain binding molecules
US4751223A (en) 1986-10-14 1988-06-14 Hoechst-Roussel Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Antiinflammatory and analgesic aminoalkyl tetracyclic benzodiazepines
US4898861A (en) 1987-03-26 1990-02-06 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Method for inhibiting the proliferation of tumor cells
US5147872A (en) 1987-06-09 1992-09-15 Golwyn Daniel H Treatment of immunologically based disorders, specifically psoriasis
US4970207A (en) 1988-07-07 1990-11-13 Fujisawa Pharmaceutical Company, Ltd. Benzodiazepine derivatives
US5258510A (en) 1989-10-20 1993-11-02 Otsuka Pharma Co Ltd Benzoheterocyclic compounds
US5041438A (en) 1989-10-30 1991-08-20 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Method for treating retroviral infections with benzodiazepine compounds
US5324726A (en) 1989-12-18 1994-06-28 Merck & Co., Inc. Benzodiazepine analogs
DE69123090D1 (en) 1990-07-06 1996-12-19 Yoshitomi Pharmaceutical Condensed thiophene compounds and their use
BR9200951A (en) 1991-03-21 1992-11-17 Hoffmann La Roche COMPOUNDS, PROCESS FOR ITS PRODUCTION, PHARMACEUTICAL PREPARATIONS AND USE
JPH07504908A (en) 1992-03-16 1995-06-01 メルク　シヤープ　エンド　ドーム　リミテツド Benzodiazepine derivatives, compositions containing them and their use in therapy
US5599352A (en) 1992-03-19 1997-02-04 Medtronic, Inc. Method of making a drug eluting stent
US5288514A (en) 1992-09-14 1994-02-22 The Regents Of The University Of California Solid phase and combinatorial synthesis of benzodiazepine compounds on a solid support
GB9307527D0 (en) 1993-04-13 1993-06-02 Fujisawa Pharmaceutical Co New venzamide derivatives,processes for the preparation thereof and pharmaceutical composition comprising the same
US6524832B1 (en) 1994-02-04 2003-02-25 Arch Development Corporation DNA damaging agents in combination with tyrosine kinase inhibitors
US5444092A (en) 1994-07-20 1995-08-22 Collins; Jerry Method and composition for treating psoriasis
JPH10504545A (en) 1994-07-29 1998-05-06 藤沢薬品工業株式会社 Benzodiazepine derivatives
CA2195973A1 (en) 1994-08-18 1996-02-29 David A. Claremon N-2,3-dihydro-1-(2-propyl)-2-oxo-5-phenyl-1h-1,4-benzodiazepines
US5618792A (en) 1994-11-21 1997-04-08 Cortech, Inc. Substituted heterocyclic compounds useful as inhibitors of (serine proteases) human neutrophil elastase
AU5752696A (en) 1995-05-18 1996-11-29 Regents Of The University Of Michigan, The Dna binding antibodies
US5677282A (en) 1995-06-07 1997-10-14 Proscript, Inc. Amino acid amides of 1,3,4-thiadiazoles as matrix metalloproteinase
US5962337A (en) 1995-06-29 1999-10-05 Pharmacopeia, Inc. Combinatorial 1,4-benzodiazepin-2,5-dione library
RU2096044C1 (en) 1995-07-19 1997-11-20 Малое предприятие "Ветта" Veterinary implantable preparation for regulation of biological rhythm in animals
US5776946A (en) 1995-08-28 1998-07-07 Mcgeer; Patrick L. Peripheral benzodiazepine receptor ligands as antiinflammatory agents
WO1997007828A1 (en) 1995-08-30 1997-03-06 The Regents Of The University Of California Therapy for cellular accumulation in chronic inflammatory diseases
ATE214055T1 (en) 1995-09-21 2002-03-15 Inst Med Molecular Design Inc RETINOID POTENTIFIING COMPOUNDS
US6579854B1 (en) 1996-08-14 2003-06-17 Vanderbilt University Diagnosis and management of infection caused by chlamydia
US7351421B2 (en) 1996-11-05 2008-04-01 Hsing-Wen Sung Drug-eluting stent having collagen drug carrier chemically treated with genipin
JP3999819B2 (en) 1996-12-10 2007-10-31 ゼリア新薬工業株式会社 1,5-Benzodiacepine derivatives
US6074859A (en) 1997-07-08 2000-06-13 Kikkoman Corporation Mutant-type bioluminescent protein, and process for producing the mutant-type bioluminescent protein
AU750245B2 (en) 1997-10-08 2002-07-11 Aurinia Phamaceuticals Inc. Deuterated cyclosporine analogs and their use as immunomodulating agents
US6100254A (en) 1997-10-10 2000-08-08 Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System Inhibitors of protein tyrosine kinases
US6206914B1 (en) 1998-04-30 2001-03-27 Medtronic, Inc. Implantable system with drug-eluting cells for on-demand local drug delivery
FR2779963A1 (en) 1998-06-22 1999-12-24 Centre Nat Rech Scient New composition useful for treat cancer, comprises compound with affinity for mitochondrial benzodiazepine receptors and agent to induce apoptosis
US6277844B1 (en) 1998-09-14 2001-08-21 Sydney Spector Compound for selective treatment of malignant cells by inhibiting cell cycle progression, decreasing Bcl2, and increasing apoptosis
US20030044776A1 (en) 1998-09-25 2003-03-06 James A. Dykens Compositions and methods for identifying agents that alter mitochondrial permeability transition pores
FR2785803B1 (en) 1998-11-17 2005-03-25 Sanofi Sa USE OF A SUBSTANCE BINDING TO THE PERIPHERAL RECEPTOR OF BENZODIAZEPINES IN THE TREATMENT OF SKIN STRESS
US7175953B2 (en) 1999-04-09 2007-02-13 Institute Fuer Diagnostik Forschung Short-warp peptide-dye conjugate as contrast agent for optical diagnostic
US7276348B2 (en) 1999-04-30 2007-10-02 Regents Of The University Of Michigan Compositions and methods relating to F1F0-ATPase inhibitors and targets thereof
US20050113460A1 (en) 1999-04-30 2005-05-26 The Regents Of The University Of Michigan Compositions and methods relating to novel compounds and targets thereof
US20060025388A1 (en) 1999-04-30 2006-02-02 Glick Gary D Compositions and methods relating to novel compounds and targets thereof
US20030119029A1 (en) 1999-04-30 2003-06-26 Regents Of The University Of Michigan Compositions and methods relating to novel benzodiazepine compounds and targets thereof
US20040176358A1 (en) 1999-04-30 2004-09-09 The Regents Of The University Of Michigan Compositions and methods relating to novel compounds and targets thereof
AU5826100A (en) 1999-07-13 2001-01-30 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Benzazepinones and quinazolines
US6524623B1 (en) 1999-11-12 2003-02-25 Milton Hodosh Therapeutic compositions and methods of use thereof
DE60117777T2 (en) 2000-05-11 2006-08-17 Eastman Chemical Co., Kingsport ACYLATED CYCLODEXTRINE GUEST INCLUSION COMPLEX
US20020048566A1 (en) 2000-09-14 2002-04-25 El-Deiry Wafik S. Modulation of cellular apoptosis and methods for treating cancer
US20020128208A1 (en) 2000-12-15 2002-09-12 Snyder James P. Nonpeptide agonists and antagonists of vasopressin receptors
AU2002317910B2 (en) 2001-06-07 2008-06-19 Via Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Cyclic nucleotide phosphodiesterase inhibitors, preparation and uses thereof
CA2457405A1 (en) 2001-08-15 2003-02-27 The Regents Of The University Of Michigan Compositions and methods relating to benzodiazepine compounds
AU2002357137A1 (en) 2001-12-10 2003-06-23 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company (1-phenyl-2-heteroaryl)ethyl-guanidine compounds as inhibitors of mitochondrial f1f0 atp hydrolase
US20040009972A1 (en) 2002-06-17 2004-01-15 Ding Charles Z. Benzodiazepine inhibitors of mitochondial F1F0 ATP hydrolase and methods of inhibiting F1F0 ATP hydrolase
US7150433B2 (en) 2002-08-16 2006-12-19 Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. Aircraft bolster trays
US20040087489A1 (en) 2002-11-06 2004-05-06 Antonio Ruiz Compositions and methods for the treatment of mycobacterial infections
WO2004050040A2 (en) 2002-12-03 2004-06-17 Vela Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Pharmaceutical composition of 1-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-4-methyl-5-ethyl-7-methoxy-8-hydroxy-5h-2,3-benzodiazepine and uses thereof
DE60329030D1 (en) 2002-12-04 2009-10-08 Ore Pharmaceuticals Inc Melanocortin receptor MODULATORS
MXPA05011741A (en) 2003-05-01 2006-05-12 Univ Michigan Compositions and methods relating to novel compounds and targets thereof.
US20050272723A1 (en) 2004-04-27 2005-12-08 The Regents Of The University Of Michigan Methods and compositions for treating diseases and conditions associated with mitochondrial function
US20090275099A1 (en) 2004-04-27 2009-11-05 Regents Of The University Of Michigan Methods and compositions for treating diseases and conditions associated with mitochondrial function
CA2571178A1 (en) 2004-07-01 2006-01-19 Synta Pharmaceuticals Corp. 2-substituted heteroaryl compounds
DE602005006585D1 (en) 2004-07-06 2008-06-19 Acp Advanced Circuit Pursuit A SYMMETRIC MIXER WITH FETS
US20060052369A1 (en) 2004-09-07 2006-03-09 The Regents Of The University Of Michigan Compositions and methods relating to novel compounds and targets thereof
AU2006203946B2 (en) 2005-01-03 2009-07-23 The Regents Of The University Of Michigan Compositions and methods relating to novel compounds and targets thereof
EP1893218A4 (en) 2005-06-01 2011-01-12 Univ Michigan Unsolvated benzodiazepine compositions and methods
WO2007050587A2 (en) 2005-10-26 2007-05-03 The Regents Of The University Of Michigan Therapeutic compositions and methods
US20070105844A1 (en) 2005-10-26 2007-05-10 Regents Of The University Of Michigan Therapeutic compositions and methods
EP1948191B1 (en) 2005-11-01 2013-01-16 The Regents of the University of Michigan Novel 1,4-benzodiazepine-2,5-diones with therapeutic properties
US7759338B2 (en) 2006-04-27 2010-07-20 The Regents Of The University Of Michigan Soluble 1,4 benzodiazepine compounds and stable salts thereof
NZ573452A (en) 2006-06-09 2011-09-30 Univ Michigan Compositions and methods relating to novel compounds and targets thereof
US8000458B2 (en) 2006-11-10 2011-08-16 International Business Machines Corporation Method and system for verifying incoming telephone numbers
NZ579507A (en) 2007-03-09 2011-11-25 Univ Michigan Compositions and methods relating to novel compounds and targets thereof
CN101855203B (en) 2007-09-14 2014-03-19 密执安州立大学董事会 F1F0-ATPase inhibitors and related methods
UA99839C2 (en) 2007-11-06 2012-10-10 Дзе Риджентс Оф Дзе Юниверсити Оф Мичиган Benzodiazepinone compounds useful in the treatment of skin conditions

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5391566A (en) * 1993-07-20 1995-02-21 Merck & Co., Inc. Benzimidazolinones substituted with phenoxyphenylacetic acid derivatives
US7125866B1 (en) * 1999-04-30 2006-10-24 Regents Of The University Of Michigan Therapeutic applications of pro-apoptotic benzodiazepines
US7144880B2 (en) * 1999-04-30 2006-12-05 Regents Of The University Of Michigan Compositions relating to novel compounds and targets thereof

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
DOURLAT ET AL.: "Novel 1,4-benzodiazepine derivatives with antiproliferative properties on tumor cell lines.", BIOORGANIC & MEDICINAL CHEMISTRY LETTERS, vol. 17, no. 9, 2007, pages 2527 - 2530, XP022015337 *

Cited By (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP2603079A1 (en) * 2010-08-12 2013-06-19 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Positive allosteric modulators of mglur2
EP2603079A4 (en) * 2010-08-12 2014-01-22 Merck Sharp & Dohme Positive allosteric modulators of mglur2
US8993779B2 (en) 2010-08-12 2015-03-31 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Positive allosteric modulators of MGLUR2
WO2019043217A1 (en) 2017-09-04 2019-03-07 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Dihydrobenzimidazolones
CN111315735A (en) * 2017-09-04 2020-06-19 C4医药公司 Dihydrobenzimidazolones
US11254672B2 (en) 2017-09-04 2022-02-22 C4 Therapeutics, Inc. Dihydrobenzimidazolones for medical treatment
US11787802B2 (en) 2017-09-04 2023-10-17 C4 Therapeutics, Inc. Dihydrobenzimidazolones for medical treatment
CN111315735B (en) * 2017-09-04 2024-03-08 C4医药公司 Dihydrobenzimidazolone
WO2020181232A1 (en) 2019-03-06 2020-09-10 C4 Therapeutics, Inc. Heterocyclic compounds for medical treatment

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP2470020A4 (en) 2013-03-13
JP2013505258A (en) 2013-02-14
EP2470020A1 (en) 2012-07-04
US20120232067A1 (en) 2012-09-13
US8673897B2 (en) 2014-03-18

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
AU2009291632B2 (en) Aryl guanidine F1F0-ATPase inhibitors and related methods
CA2628193C (en) Novel 1,4-benzodiazepine-2,5-diones with therapeutic properties
JP5843770B2 (en) P2X4 receptor antagonist
Walser et al. Triazolobenzo-and triazolothienodiazepines as potent antagonists of platelet activating factor
US20090118244A1 (en) Benzodiazepinone compounds useful in the treatment of skin conditions
RO114128B1 (en) 1,5-benzodiazepine derivatives, process for preparing the same, pharmaceutical compositions containing said derivatives and method of treatment
US20100056515A1 (en) Benzimidazole compounds
US7465722B2 (en) Biphenyl vasopressin agonists
Hussenether et al. Clozapine derived 2, 3-dihydro-1H-1, 4-and 1, 5-benzodiazepines with D4 receptor selectivity: synthesis and biological testing
WO2011035124A1 (en) Benzodiazepinone compounds and methods of treatment using same
FI92486B (en) Process for the preparation of therapeutically active 3-acylamino-2-oxo-1H-2,3-dihydro-1,4-benzodiazepine compounds
US3429874A (en) 1-polyhalogenoalkyl-2-oxo-1,3-dihydro-2h-1,4-benzodiazepines
JPH09504005A (en) Benzodiazepine derivative
US20160304465A1 (en) Alkylpyrazolyl guanidine f1f0-atpase inhibitors and therapeutic uses thereof
US5486514A (en) Carbamate derivatives
KR0157068B1 (en) Novel 3-oxadiazolyl-1,6-naphthyridine derivatives
FI63405C (en) FREQUENCY REFERENCE FOR THERAPEUTIC USE OF THERAPEUTIC IMMEDIATE (1,5-A) (1,4) DIAZEPINE-FOUNDATION
US4451464A (en) Trifluoromethyl substituted tricyclic quinazolinones useful as tranquilizers
JPH0741476A (en) Benzodiazepine derivative

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 10817891

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2012529929

Country of ref document: JP

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2010817891

Country of ref document: EP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 13395566

Country of ref document: US